Home
        Sony PDW-R1 User's Manual
         Contents
1.     
2.                                                                                                                                                              6 3 4    RESET button          Watching the indicators above the time data display   press the COUNTER SEL button to select TC     Press the HOLD button     The SHUTTLE button lights and the first two digits of  the time code shown in the time data display start  flashing     To set all digits to 0  Press the RESET button     Select the digits to set by rotating the shuttle dial or jog  dial     The flashing digits change to the next two digits on the  right when you rotate the shuttle dial or jog dial  clockwise  and to the next two digits on the left when  you rotate it counterclockwise     Set the value for the flashing digits by rotating the  shuttle dial or jog dial while holding the SHUTTLE  button     Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you finish setting all digits     Press the SET button     e An initial time code value is set and the monitor  returns to the time code display before the HOLD  button was pressed in step 2     e If the F RUN R RUN switch is set to F RUN  the  time code starts advancing from the initial value  immediately     To set time code to the time of the internal clock  You can record time code synchronized to the time of the  internal clock    To do so  set the INT EXT RP188 switch to INT  set the  PRESET REGEN switch to PRESET  and then proceed as  follows     1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previ
3.                                                                     1 Press the JOG button  turning it on     2 Turn the jog dial in the desired direction  at the speed  corresponding to the desired playback speed     Playback in jog mode starts   3 To stop playback in jog mode  stop turning the jog dial     When extended menu item 101    SELECTION FOR  SEARCH DIAL ENABLE    is set to    dial     factory default    4 2 Playback   51    yoeghe d Bulpiooey p seydeyp                          yoeghe q Buipio0ey y Jaydeyo                          setting   just turning the jog dial with the JOG button off  starts playback in jog mode     Playback in shuttle mode    In shuttle mode  you can control the speed of playback by  the angular position of the shuttle dial  The range of  playback speed is  20 times normal speed    To carry out playback in shuttle mode  proceed as follows                                                                                GO    2 3          COUNTER SEL button  SUBCLIP button    13                                                                                                                          T With the SUBCLIP button off  press the  THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     The thumbnails of clips on the disc appear              Press the SHUTTLE button  turning it on     2 Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle  corresponding to the desired playback speed     Playback in shuttle mode starts     3 To stop playback in shuttle mode  return the
4.                        Jog dial   gt  OUT button  4   buttons   lt  IN button  NEXT button  PREV button             1 Carry out steps 1 to 4 of 5 2 2    Reordering Sub Clips     to select a sub clip and display the sub clip operation  menu     2 Use the or button to select TRIM  and then press  the SET button     The first frame of the selected sub clip appears  The   first and last frames are set as provisional In and Out  points  and the IN and OUT indicators light    In this state  you can play back and search the entire   disc        SUB CLIP TRIM        l TCR 0006 20 00  M  IN 00 00 00 00 OUT 01 16 00 00          To cancel the trim and return to the previous  screen   With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button     3 Play back and search the disc to find scenes to set new  In and Out points     4 At the scene where you want to set a new In or Out  point  hold down the  lt  IN button  to change the In  point  or the  gt  OUT button  to change the Out point   and press the SET button     Depending on the button that you pressed  a new In or  Out point is set     To change both the In and Out points    Carry out steps 3 and 4 for both the In and Out points     To reset the In or Out point   With the    IN button or  gt  OUT button held down   press the RESET button  The In or Out point is  restored to the value it had before the sub clip trim  screen opened     To cue up the In or Out point   With the  lt  IN button held down  press the PREV  button  Or with the 
5.               Type of time data e Block B displays the servo lock status or playback speed                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Display Meaning  CNT Counter data  TCR TC reader time code data  UBR TC reader user bits data  TCR  VITC reader time code _   UBR  VITC reader user bits data  TCG TC generator time code  UBG TC generator user bits data  IN IN point time data      OUT OUT point time data Display Operationmode  DUR Duration between IN point and OUT Block A Bocke  point DISC OUT Disc is not loaded   LOADING Disc is being loaded       UNLOADING Disc is being unloaded   If the time data or user   s bits cannot be read correctly  STANDBY OFF Sisndby off m  d  they will be displayed with an asterisk  For example  st AOSS     T R        U R        TR     or    U R      STOP Stop mode  NEXT Cuing up to the first frame of the     Time code reader drop frame mark  for 525 line next clip   mode only  PREV Cuing up to the first frame of the          Indicates drop frame mode current clip            Indicates non drop frame mode FFWD Fast forward search     Time code generator drop frame mark  for 525 line imi Fasnia ae reel   mode only  PLAY Playback mode  servo unlocked            Indicates drop frame mode  factory default setting  PLAY LOCK  Playback mode  servo locked            Indicates non drop frame mo
6.             88       Chapter 7 Menus    7 1 Menu System Configuration              89  7 2 Basic Setup Menu             cccccccssseeeeees 90  7 2 1 Items in the Basic Setup Menu         90  7 2 2 Basic Menu Operations                  4  94  7 3 Extended Menu            ssssccssssscsssssees 97  7 3 1 Items in the Extended Menu             97  7 3 2 Extended Menu Operations             108  7 3 3 Using UMID Data    ossee 109  7 4 Maintenance Menu    112  7 4 1 Items in the Maintenance Menu     112  7 4 2 Maintenance Menu Operations       114  7 5 System Menu        ccccsssseeeteeeeseseeees 117  7 5 1 Items in the System Menu              117  7 5 2 System Menu Operations                117       Chapter 8 Maintenance and       Troubleshooting  8 1 Periodic Maintenance                   120  8 1 1 Digital Hours Meter    120  8 2 Condensation                 cccceeeeeeeeeeees 121  8 3 Error Messages       cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121  8 4 ALAIN i csiscsisssccistiicpeieseisnnetctecnsasiiniens 122  8 4 1 Alarm List    eeeeeesseeeesseeeeneees 122  Appendixes  Specifications sic cccccecs casseieads seraserceasensccue 131  Using the Shoulder Belt                c00 134  Notice Concerning the Software License of  THiS UNIE n aieeaa aea aeaaaee 135  MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio  LIGCCNSC wisi icsdevccceedeeniestensiscneteeeseiarensiens 148  GIOSSALY   cssssviisiecescciientinveesseeriaiaanseestaans 149    Table of Contents       Before Using the Unit       Setting the Line Mode    Th
7.        Settings    Select the state that the unit goes into after a cuing up operation   stop  Stops  the stop mode    still  Still playback  in jog and shuttle mode         7 3 Extended Menu          Menu items in the 500s  relating to disc protection          Item number  501    Item name  STILL TIMER          Settings    To protect the disc against shock and vibrations  and to lengthen the life   of the laser diodes  the unit automatically enters standby off mode   whenever a specified time elapses in a disc stop mode  stop mode or the   still picture mode of search mode   This allows you to set the time after   which the unit exits a disc stop mode and enters standby off mode    0 5 s  0 5 sec     8 m  8 min     30 m  30 min   Can be set in the range  from 0 5 seconds to 30 minutes    off  Do not put into standby off mode           Menu items in the 600s  relating to the time code  metadata  and UMID       Item number  601    Item name  VITC POSITION SEL 1    Settings    Select a line into which to insert VITC signals for IMX recording signals a     and DVCAM playback signals        12 H  12 line     16 H  16 line     20 H  20 line   in 525 U  525 J  line  modes    9 H  9 line     19 H  19 line     22 H  22 line   in 625 line mode     You can insert the VITC signal in two places  To insert it in two places   set both items 601 and 602     a  In the IMX format  VITC is inserted as video signals in vertical blanking sections   Because these signals are output as video signa
8.        VIDEO INPUT SEL button setting COMPOSITE  Item 335 setting ref auto  Item 308 setting STD N STD STD N STD  Operation mode External synchronization status  When a signal is input   E E mode REF    REF    REF     REF     to the REF VIDEO IN  connector Normal playback  REC button pressed  Recording INPUT Free  gt    When no signal is E E mode INPUT Free  gt   Free RUN    Free RUN     input to the REF  VIDEO IN connector   Normal playback  REC button pressed  Recording  VIDEO INPUT SEL button setting SDI i LINK SG  Item 335 setting ref auto ref auto ref auto  Item 308 setting STD N STD STD N STD STD N STD STD N STD  Operation mode External synchronization status  When a signal is input   E E mode REF    REF    REF     REF     to the REF VIDEO IN  connector Normal playback  REC button pressed  Recording SDI IN Free     When no signal is E E mode SDI IN Free    Free RUN    Free RUN     input to the REF  VIDEO IN connector   Normal playback  REC button pressed  Recording                a  Synchronize to the reference signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector   b  Synchronize to the signal input to the VIDEO IN connector  If no signal is    input to the connector  no synchronization is made     c  Synchronize to the signal input to the SDI IN connector  If no signal is  input to the connector  no synchronization is made   d  No external synchronization is made     Menu items in the 400s  relating to preroll       Item number  401          Item name  FUNCTION MODE AFTER CUE UP
9.      2 Set the following item              Item Contents  COUNTRY Country code  ORGANIZATION   Organization code  USER User code                To change the currently selected item  Hold down the STOP button  and turn the jog dial or  shuttle dial     To select a different digit to be changed  Turn the jog dial or shuttle dial     To change the value of a digit  Hold down the SHUTTLE button  and turn the jog dial  or shuttle dial     3 Press the SET button     About UMID ownership information  COUNTRY  country code     Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string  4 byte  alphanumeric strings  according to the values defined in  ISO 3166 1    There are about 240 country codes    Find your own country code on the following home page     Refer to ISO 3166 1   http   www evertype com standards iso3 1 66 iso3166 1   en html    When the country code is less than 4 bytes  the active part  of the code will occupy the first part of the 4 bytes and the  remainder must be filled with the space character  20h    Example  In the case of Japan  For Japan  if the country code is JP  it is 2 bytes  if JPN  it  is 3 bytes   Thus  enter the following    JP__   or   JPN _   where _ represents a space     ORGANIZATION  organization code   Enter an abbreviated 4 byte alphanumeric string for the  organization code     e Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the  SMPTE registration office   When no organization code has been acquired  it is  forbidden to enter an arbitrary string  As a r
10.      When the  format is DVCAM  this is always 4ch     VIN The video input signal selected with the  VIDEO INPUT SEL button  setting  values  SDI  COMPST  SG  i LINK    AINn  n  channel  The audio input signal selected with the   number 1 to 4  AUDIO INPUT SEL button  setting  values  SDI  AES EBU  SG  ANALOG        2 3 LCD Panel    19    Sed JO suoljouny pue sewen zsejdeyp Mh    Sped Jo suojouny pue sewen z Ja deyo WA    20       Item  PROC    Description    This appears when at least 1 video  processing parameter has been set to     VAR  VARIABLE         The line mode of the current clip on the  disc  setting values  525  625   the  video recording format  setting values   IMX50  IMX40  IMX30  DVCAM   and  the number of audio recording  channels  setting values  8ch  4ch     DISC          RMT When the remote control switch is set  to REMOTE  the control interface  selected with extended menu item 214   setting values  9PIN  i LINK    b                 PARA This appears when the parallel  recording with camcorder function is    enabled        AC IN  DC IN     V  BATT 22       V     The type of power supplied to this unit   AC IN  AC power  DC IN  DC power   BATT  battery pack   The voltage  units   V  appears when DC power is used   and the remaining battery charge  unit     or V  appears when the battery pack  is used        22MIN Free capacity remaining on disc  unit     minutes        222 Playback order number of clip being    played back         h  M  s            Durati
11.     3 Select    Sony XDCAM PDW R1 IEEE 1394 SBP2  Device    and click OK     e Windows 2000  A confirmation message appears      Windows XP     Sony XDCAM PDW R1 IEEE  1394 SBP2 Device    is deleted from the Hardware  devices list     This unit can now resume normal operations   The  limitations described in    Operation limitations during  FAM connections     see page 79  no longer apply      4 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required     To reconnect    To reconnect after exiting file operations  do one of the   following  depending on whether an i LINK cable is   connected    i LINK cable is not connected  Connect this unit and a  remote computer with an i LINK cable    i LINK cable is connected  Disconnect the i LINK cable  from either this unit or the remote computer  wait for  at least 10 seconds  and then reconnect the  disconnected cable    The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is  connected  Power the unit on     6 2 File Access Mode File Operations    79    suonesado aji4 9 Jadeyo HMM    suoeredo   ll4 9 Ja deyo AN    80    To disable FAM connections    Execute one of the procedures described in the previous  section    Reconnecting    to make a FAM connection  between this unit and the remote computer  To disable  FAM connections  set extended menu item 215    i LINK  MODE     to    AV C        For more information about how to make this setting  see  7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108      6 3 FTP File Operations       6 3 FTP File Operations    F
12.     AES EBU  3 4 Audio channels  setting values  tr1 2   tr3 4  tr5 6  tr7 8  assigned to the  DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  OUT 3 4  connectors with sub item 2 of extended    menu item 827       SDI DV 1 2 Audio channels  setting values  tr1 2   tr3 4  tr5 6  tr7 8  assigned to channels    1 and 2 of the SDI OUT  SUPER  and      S400  i LINK  connectors with sub  item 1 of extended menu item 828        SDI DV  3 4 Audio channels  setting values  tr1 2   tr3 4  tr5 6  tr7 8  assigned to channels    3 and 4 of the SDI OUT  SUPER  and        400  i LINK  connectors with sub  item 2 of extended menu item 828                When you press this button with the SHIFT button held  down  the process control screen appears in the video  panel  You can use this screen to adjust the following  parameters    e Video output level   e Chroma output level   e Setup black level   e Chroma phase   e Output signal sync phase   e Output signal subcarrier phase    See    Adjusting video processing parameters     page 49   for more information about how to make the adjustments        CHARACTER switch   Selects whether or not to superimpose the time code  menu  settings  alarm messages  or other text information on the  video signals output from the side panel SDI OUT   SUPER  and VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  connectors and  also on the unit   s video panel    ON  Superimpose character information    OFF  Do not superimpose character information    The factory default setting is ON        LIGHT switch   Selects 
13.     STOR    command  the original time code of the  transferred file is recorded  regardless of the settings of the  INT EXT RP188 switch and the PRESET REGEN switch     6 4 Recording Continuous Time Code With FAM and FTP Connections          Menus Chapter             7 1Menu System  Configuration    The settings for this unit use the following menus   e Setup menu  See the next item   e Maintenance menu  This provides audio control  and network and setup  menu settings  and also shows version information   For details  see 7 4    Maintenance Menu     page 112    e System menu  This provides disc formatting  date setting  and similar  operations   For details  see 7 5    System Menu     page 117      Setup menu  The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic  setup menu  also referred to simply as    basic menu     and  extended setup menu  also referred to simply as    extended  menu       e Basic menu  This menu is used to make settings relating  for example   to the following     the digital hours meter    the preroll time    the text information superimposed on the video output  to the monitor    the menu banks for retaining menu settings     Extended menu  This menu is used to make a wide range of settings  relating to the functions of this unit  for example  the  control panel functions  video and audio control  and  digital data processing     Configuration of the basic setup menu  The basic setup menu comprises the following groups of  items                   
14.     off     VITC is recorded if the input video signal  contains VITC and the VITC line is set to    thru    with item 723    628 DF MODE In 525 U  525 J  line modes  when the INT EXT RP188 switch is set to  INT and the PRESET REGEN switch is set to PRESET  select the frame  mode of the internal time code generator and counter   df  on  df    Drop frame mode  ndf  off  ndf    Non drop frame mode   629 TC SELECT Select the type of time data to show in the time data display  and the type  of external time code when the INT EXT RP188 switch is set to EXT and  the PRESET REGEN switch is set to REGEN   vite  Display time code as VITC  or select VITC as the external time   code   te  Display time code as TC  or select TC as the external time code   See 4 1 2    Recording Time Code and User Bit Values     page 44  for  more information about selecting external time code    632 TC UBIT SELECT When item 629 is set to    tc     specify whether to synchronize the user bits  of the time code generator to the internal clock   fix  Do not synchronize user bits   time  Synchronize user bits to the internal clock    633 VITC UBIT SELECT When item 629 is set to    vitc     specify whether to synchronize the user  bits of the time code generator to the internal clock   fix  Do not synchronize user bits   time  Synchronize user bits to the internal clock    634 WATCH AUTO ADJUST When external time code input contains real time clock user bits  specify  whether to adjust the internal clock to ma
15.     the clips    that failed were lost     To exit without salvaging   Press the RESET button    The state of section where recording was interrupted is  saved  but no salvage processing is done    Sections which were recorded normally can be played  back  but no new recording can be done on the disc   A  quick format can be done on the disc  although all of  its contents will be lost      Unless clips are salvaged  the message    Salvage       appears again the next time the disc is inserted or the  unit is powered on     3 6 Handling Discs    41    suoeredalg    Ja deyo                               Recording Playback Chapter             4 1 Recording    This section describes video and audio recording on the  unit        4 1 1 Preparations for Recording    Button switch settings    Before beginning recording  make any necessary button   switch settings     For details of the settings of the buttons switches  see the  pages indicated in parenthesis         es                                                                                                                                  o BB RE  7  a a  RESET  t        DO    0 Diane                     AUDIO INPUT CH button  page 19  and AUDIO  INPUT SEL button  page 19   Select the input audio signal     4 1 Recording       Remote control switch  page 12   Set to LOCAL        On    standby switch  page 12   Indicator  I  lit green        VARIABLE switch  page 15  and ALL CH 1  CH   2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs  page 15   Adju
16.     you can also cause this to simultaneously  adjust the output volume from the AUDIO OUT 1 3 and 2   4 connectors on the side panel  To do this  in the setup  menu  set extended menu item 114    AUDIO MONITOR  OUTPUT LEVEL    to    var        When no headphones are connected  you can listen to  audio through the built in speaker  monaural         DC OUT  DC power output  12V connector  4 pin   female    Supplies power to the BVR 3 Remote Control Unit  not   supplied  and the RM 280 Editing Controller  not   supplied    Max  5 W     Do not connect to any external device except those listed  above     2 4 Connectors 21    Sed JO suonouny pue sawe zi sejdeyp Mh    Sued Jo suoyouny pue sawe Zz Ja deyo WA       REMOTE  remote control signal  connector  D   sub 9 pin    To control the PDW R1 from a controller or VTR   supporting the RS 422A Sony 9 pin VTR protocol    connect the device to this connector        REF VIDEO IN  reference video signal input   connector  BNC type   Input a reference video signal           network  connector  RJ 45 type    This is a 1 OBase T 100Base TX connector for network  connection    To transfer files between an external device and the PDW   R1  connect a network cable to this connector and the  external device     For safety  do not connect the connector for peripheral  device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this  port  Follow the instructions in this manual when making  connections     ATTENTION    Par mesure de s  curit    ne raccor
17.    F cip        c0001 mxF                      a C0001M01 XML          C0002 MXF           cooozmor XML           C0003 MxF           Co003mo1 XML    A Edit       E0001E01 SMI          3 E0001M01 XML       B E0002E01 SMI           E0002M01 XML    tL  Sub        Co001S01 MXF          3 C0002801  MXF                 co003s01 MxF      General             a  Root directory    b  Only when sub item    NAMING FORM    of basic menu item 036 is set to     free             6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions    This section explains which operations are possible on  files stored in each directory    When required  the following operation tables distinguish  reading and overwriting from partial reading and    Partial read  Read only a part of the data in the file    Overwrite  Overwrite data sequentially from the start  to the end of the file    Partial overwrite  Overwrite data to a part of the file                                                    free     b  Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM    overwriting  only   Read  Read data sequentially from the start to the end  of the file   Root directory  File name Content Operations  Read  Overwrite    Rename Create Delete  Partial read   Partial  overwrite  INDEX XML Contains data for management of   Yes No No No No  the audio video material on the  disc   ALIAS XML    Contains conversion tables for Yes No No No No  assigning user defined names to  clips and clip lists   DISCMETA XML_   Contains metadata to indicate the   Yes Y
18.    See the previous item      When the IP address is assigned automatically                   my  Te core    Wo Fecasa Gt       SPPPT  900585  1a    gt  P      J  G                                                                            7 4 Maintenance Menu    115           NM    snuey  Z Ja deyo WA    116    Using the 4     buttons to select    IP ADDRESS        Press the  gt  button     The IP ADDRESS PRESET menu appears  and the  digit that can be changed flashes        Item selection screen  Flashing       IP ANDRESS PRESET     l7   IP   19 168 001 010  SIN   DHCP  disable    SHIFT    e    gt  KEY  INC DEC   JOG DIAL  CLEAR   RESET KEY  DATA SET   SET KEY  TO MENU   MENU KEY                      Set the IP address     To select a different digit to be changed  Use the  lt   gt  buttons     To change the value of a digit   Turn the jog dial or shuttle dial    Turning clockwise increases the value  and turning  counterclockwise decreases the value    The 4    buttons can be used     To return to the factory default setting  Press the RESET button     When all digits are set  press the SET button   This returns to the NETWORK CONFIG menu     To cancel a setting   Before pressing the SET button  press the MENU  button    This returns to the NETWORK CONFIG menu   without saving the new setting     Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required  to set the subnet mask  and default gateway     In the NETWORK CONFIG menu  press the SET  button     When the    NOW SAVING       message vanishe
19.    audio shot by the camcorder  The following figure shows  an example of the connections to make     3 1 Connections and Settings    27    suoneied  ld    Ja deyo                          suoeredaid     Ja deyo                          28                i LINK cable  not supplied     CL  E    DSR 400 400P 450WS 450WSP                         DSR 400 400P 450WS 450WSP settings   REC TRIGGER switch  INT ONLY      REC FORMAT    on the VTR MODE page of the  MAINTENANCE menu  DVCAM    PDW R1 settings   Remote control switch  see page 12   REMOTE   VIDEO INPUT SEL button  see page 19   select i LINK   Basic menu item 031    RECORDING FORMAT     DVCAM   Extended menu item 214    REMOTE INTERFACE     i LINK   Extended menu item 215    i LINK MODE     AV C   Extended menu item 216    PARALLEL RECORDING MODE      on       3 1 Connections and Settings          3 1 5 Connections for Cut Editing    By connecting this unit to a VTR  for example  MSW   M2000 M2000P or DSR 2000 2000P  and an editing  control unit  you can make up a cut editing system  Some  example connections are shown in the following     When using an editing control unit    When making the connections  also refer to the manuals  provided with the equipment to be connected    See page 32 for more information about editing control  unit settings        Cut editing system comprising this unit as a player  an  MSW M2000 M2000P unit as a recorder  and a BVE 700  editing control unit     Video monitor    To analog audio input
20.    e Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut  editing in the field and in other offline situations    e Clip lists  edit data  created with the scene selection  function can be used on XPRI and other full feature  nonlinear editing systems     58 5 1 Overview    Flow of scene selection editing       Insert disc containing recorded    material into this unit       To edit a clip list    ee    Create and edit a clip list    e Selecting clips  see page 61     e Reordering sub clips  see page 63   e Trimming sub clips  see page 65    e Deleting sub clips  see page 66    e Previewing clip lists  see page 66        Save the clip list to disc  see page 66        Play back the clip list  see page 54           PDW 510 530    Load clip lists  see page 68                                                                 Sera  Recorded material clips Clip list 1  Clip 1 Clip list 1  Clip 2 i    Clip 3    Disc       Sub  clip 1    Sub  clip 2    Sub  clip 3                Play back clip list          59    5 1 Overview    uooaj  s   u  os gJa deyo N    uo  oajas BUsDg Gg Ja deYyD WN    60    Clips   Material recorded on a disc with this unit is managed in  units called    clips     A clip contains the material between a  recording start point  In point  and a recording end point   Out point     Clips have names beginning with    C    for example     C0001              Out  point    Out point  In point    Out point  In point    Out point    In point In point    J J 1 J    Clip 1 C
21.    output is 8 channels with no switching  and RP188 time   code output is set to on  You can change these settings with   extended menu item 828    SDI DV AUDIO OUTPUT   SELECT    and extended menu item 920    SD SDI H ANC   CONTROL       The output can have time code  menu settings  alarm   messages  and other text information superimposed  To   turn superimposition off  set the maintenance menu item      OTHERS       SDI SUPER    to    OFF        To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as  non audio signals  set the maintenance menu item    2 4 Connectors 23    Sed JO suoljouny pue sewen zsejdeyp NM    Sued Jo suoyouny pue sewe Zz Ja deyo WA       AUDIO CONFIG       NON AUDIO INPUT     recording   and extended menu item 823    NON AUDIO FLAG PB      playback      See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make extended menu  settings    See 7 4 2    Maintenance Menu Operations     page 114   for more information about how to make maintenance  menu Settings      5  Time code inputs outputs         TC IN connector      TC OUT connector  ry      TC IN connector  BNC type   This inputs an SMPTE time code generated by an external  device                          TC OUT connector  BNC type    This outputs the following time code  depending on the   operating state of the PDW R1    During playback  playback time code   During recording  the time code from the internal time  code generator or the time code input to the 
22.   128 to O to 127  phase   gt  Output signal Oto 511  subcarrier phase                   a  Underlined values are the factory defaults     The figure below is an example of the screen that  appears when you hold the PLAY button down           PROCESS CONTROL    V  CHROMA  PRE                                    Setting    Marker indicating the  position of the setting in    Select    PRE    or    VAR    _ the adjustment range             3 if you selected    VAR    in step 2  set the parameter  value by holding down the corresponding button and  rotating the jog dial  while viewing the video     Setting values vary with the rotation speed of the jog  dial     4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to set other  parameters     5 Press the STATUS button to return to the normal  screen        4 2 2 Playback Operation    This section describes the following types of playback    e Normal playback   Playback at normal   1  speed   Playback in jog mode   Variable speed playback  with the speed determined by  the speed of turning the jog dial   Playback in shuttle mode   Variable speed playback  with the speed determined by  the angular position of the shuttle dial    Normal playback    First insert a disc     For details of how to insert a disc  see 3 6 4    Loading and  Unloading a Disc    on page 38                                        D  k 7 w                      Shuttle dial                            STOP button  NEXT button  PLAY button  PREV button    Jog dial    4 MARK1 button
23.   3 Press the SET button     Thumbnails of the frames including the selected  essence mark appear      The example shows the case where SHOTMARK 1 is  selected as the essence mark         This indicates that the thumbnail  images are the frames including the  essence mark  SHOTMARKY1      Sixth frame is selected  from a total of 31  SHOTMARK1 frames    SHOTMARK1    TC 00 00 00 00    27 AUG 12 00  _       Currently selected  SHOTMARK1 frame    Date and time of recording of the clip  containing the selected frame             4 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  desired frame     You can select frames with the following operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Move to the  previous or next frame    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  button held down  Move to the first or last frame    Press the 4 or Y button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switch to the previous or next page     5 Press the SET button to cue up the selected clip     To start playback from the selected frame  press the  PLAY button     4 2 Playback    53    yoeghe d Bulpiovey p seydeyp                          yoeghe q Buipio0ey y 4aydeyD                          54       4 2 4 Clip List Playback    You can play back clips in the order of clip lists created  with the scene selection function  see page 58      Playing back in clip list order  Proceed as follows     1 Ifthe clip list that you want to play exists on the disc   load it into the current clip list     About the curren
24.   AUDIO  CONFIG     to select 16 bits 8 channels or 24 bits 4  channels    The factory default setting is 16 bits 8 channels   When using the DVCAM format for video  Selection is  not necessary  The format of 16 bits 4 channels is   selected automatically     For details of the maintenance menu operations  see 7 4 2     Maintenance Menu Operations    on page 114     File writing formats with FAM and FTP   connections   It is not necessary to set the video recording format   UMX50 IMX40 IMX30 DVCAM  and the audio   recording format  16bit x 8ch 24bit x 4ch  before writing   files    The file formats which can be written to the disc depend on   whether clips are already recorded on the disc    When you insert a disc with no recorded clips  Files in  all of the above formats can be written    When you insert a disc with recorded clips  Files in the  same video and audio formats as the clips on the disc  can be written     Making thumbnail image settings    As required  you can select which frame to display as a  clip   s thumbnail image   When the unit is shipped from the  factory  it is set up to display the first frame as the  thumbnail     For example  if all clips have the same image in their first  frames  you can specify a frame a few seconds after the  start of the clip  so that thumbnails will not all show the  same image     To specify the frame to use as the thumbnail  image   Set extended menu item 143    INDEX PICTURE  POSITION    to a number in the range from 0 to 1
25.   Carry out blanking   thru  throu   Switch off blanking        Specify blanking for line 20    bink  blank   Carry out blanking   half  Carry out half blanking   thru  throu   Switch off blanking        LINE 12     LINE 20       LINE 21    In 525 J  line  mode    Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20     bink  blank   Carry out blanking   thru  throu   Switch off blanking        Specify blanking for line 21    bink  blank   Carry out blanking   half  Carry out half blanking   thru  throu   Switch off blanking        LINE 9  322      LINE 22   335       16       LINE 23       In 625 line  mode    Specify blanking for lines 9  322 to 22  335     bink  blank   Carry out blanking   thru  throu   Switch off blanking        Specify blanking for line 23   half  Carry out half blanking   thru  throu   Switch off blanking        705    EDGE SUBCARRIER REDUCER  MODE    Select whether to enable the edge subcarrier reducer  ESR    on  Enable    off  Do not enable    When playing back a composite signal  set this to    on           707    FORCED VERTICAL    INTERPOLATION OFF    The    Y add    function is normally switched on automatically during jog or  variable speed playback  This item selects whether or not to force the    Y add     function off    auto  Automatically switch the    Y add    function on    off  forced YADD off   Force the    Y add    function off    The    Y add    function is off while a disc image is displayed in stop mode  menu  item 108    AUTO EE SELECT    is    of
26.   DUR 00 03 10 00  ON CLIP LIST    To go to the clip deletion screen without displaying  the THUMBNAIL MENU   After step 2  press the RESET button with the SHIFT  button held down  shortcut operation      To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail   screen   Do one of the following    e Use the 4 or   button to select    CANCEL     and then  press the SET button    e Press the RESET button     5 Use the 4 or    button to select    OK     and then press  the SET button     The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail  screen     To delete all clips    1 Carry out steps 1 and 3 of    Deleting clips    to display  the THUMBNAIL MENU     2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select DELETE  ALL CLIPS  and then press the SET button     A confirmation screen appears     To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail   screen   Do one of the following    e Use the 4 or   button to select    CANCEL     and then  press the SET button    e Press the RESET button     3 Use the    or   button to select    OK     and then press  the SET button     All clips are deleted  and you return to the thumbnail  screen        4 2 Playback    57    yoeghe d Bulpiooey p seydeyp                          Scene Selection   chapter                      5 1 Overview    What is scene selection     Scene selection is a function which allows you to select   material  clips  from the material recorded on a disc and   perform cut editing  You can do this by operating on this   unit only 
27.   Moves to the first or last sub  clip    Press the 4 or   button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switches to the previous or next page    Does not switch when there is only one page      With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button     The sub clip operation menu appears     PER    27 AUG 11 0    To return to the thumbnail screen without moving   the sub clip   Do one of the following    e Press the 4 or     button to select EXIT  and then  press the SET button    e Press the RESET button     Use the 4 or   button to select MOVE  and then press  the SET button     The sub clip movement screen appears  The clip  selected in step 3 appears surrounded by a frame     5 2 Creating Clip Lists             Indicates that the third sub clip will be  moved to the position of the eighth sub clip     Cursor indicating the move destination  for the selected sub clip             To return to the previous screen  Press the RESET button     Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to move the  cursor to the position where you want to move the  selected sub clip     To return to the previous screen  Press the THUMBNAIL button     Press the SET button     The sub clip thumbnail screen appears  allowing you  to check the results of the sub clip movement        8 Save the current clip list to disc     See 5 2 6    Saving the Current Clip List to Disc     page  66         5 2 3 Trimming Sub Clips       SET button         THUMBNAIL button    SHIFT button  RESET button    ae              
28.   Round type 4 pin  female  x1   When driven by AC power  DC 14 5 V   Max  5W  When driven by DC power or battery  DC  11 to 17 V  Max  5W    1  Use as power source for BVR 3 Remote Control Unit  not supplied  and  RM 280 Editing Controller  not supplied      Others  Video panel Picture  3 5 type  Pixel resolution  211 200 pixels  960  wide x 220 high   Effective picture elements  more than  99 99     Accessories supplied    Operation manuals  English version  1   Japanese version  1   CD ROM manual  1   PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software  1   Connector caps For  AC IN DC IN 12V connector  1   For AUDIO IN connectors  2   For AUDIO OUT connectors  2   For BNC connectors  12   For as  S400  i LINK  connector  1   For REMOTE connector  1   For DC OUT 12V connector  1     Accessories not supplied    AC power cord  e For the customers in the U S A and Canada  Part No  1 551 812 41  125 V  10 A  about 2 4 m   e For the customers in the United Kingdom  Part No  1 777 823 12  250 V  10 A  about 2 0 m   e For the customers in European countries other than the  United Kingdom  Part No  1 551 631 61  250 V  10 A  about 2 0 m   Shoulder strap  Part No  A 6772 374 C     Related products    Battery packs  BP GL95  BP GL65  BP L80S  BP   L60S  RM 280 editing controller    Design and specifications are subject to change without  notice        Notes   e Always make a test recording  and verify that it was  recorded successfully    SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY  KIND INCLUDING  BUT NO
29.   Settings    Select whether or not to display alarm messages    off  Do not display alarm messages   However  certain important alarms are  displayed     limit  on  limited    Display only a minimum number of alarm messages    on  Display all alarm messages     For details about alarm message display conditions  see 8 4 1    Alarm List      page 122         017 SUB STATUS DISPLAY SELECT    Determine the kind of sub status information to be displayed on the    monitor       off  Do not output sub status information    rmain  disc remain   Available disc space  unit  minute    clip  clip no   Order of playback of the selected clip total number of clips   posi  playback position   Playback position within clip   pbr  playback remain   The remaining playback time of the selected clip  from the current playback position  hours minutes seconds frames      a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector     When menu item 005 is set to    off    sub status information is not displayed  when this item is set to anything other than    off           024 MENU CHARACTER TYPE    Determine the type of characters in menu text displayed on the monitor  a   white  White letters on a black background    black  Black letters on a white background    W out  White letters with black outline    B out  Black letters with white outline     a  Video panel and external monitor  when the in
30.   System menu 117  items 117  operations 117    T    TC 13  TC VITC indicator 18  Text information 35  display adjustment 35  drop frame mark 36  information displayed 35  operation mode 36  TC generator drop frame mark 36  time data types 36  VITC field mark 36  THUMBNAIL button 13  Thumbnail image  setting 43  Thumbnail search 9  52  TIME CODE  IN connector 24  OUT connector 24  Time code  initial value 44  inputs outputs 24  recording 44  88  Time data  display 18    types 36  Time data settings section 13  Title 75  Troubleshooting 120    U    UB VIUB indicator 18  U BIT 13   UMID data 109   User bit recording 44    V    VARIABLE switch 15  VIDEO   IN connectors 23   INPUT SEL button 19   OUT 1  OUT 2  SUPER    connectors 23   Video panel 17  Video processing   adjusting parameters 49  Video recording format setting 43  VITC   field mark 36   indicator 18    W    WARNING indicator 17  Write protecting discs 38    Index    153    ae HMM    The material contained in this manual consists of information  that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely  for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this  manual    Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other  than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described  in this manual without the express written permission of Sony  Corporation     PDW R1 Sony Corporation   SY   3 991 786 02  1  http   www sony net     2006
31.   added to the end of the current clip list as a sub clip     When you set In and Out points stretching across  several clips  One sub clip is created for each of the clips     5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you have added all of the clips  you want to the current clip list     6 Save the current clip list to disc     See 5 2 6    Saving the Current Clip List to Disc     page  66         5 2 2 Reordering Sub Clips       SET button  SUBCLIP button  THUMBNAIL button  SHIFT button  RESET button             o    Oe SEE    ors zE  lt 00 gt  fe   eooo0seg ae   bE  ed BI nA   i C E        a                                             Jog dial   gt  OUT button  Arrow buttons   lt  IN button    NEXT button  PREV button             1 Press the SUBCLIP button  turning it on     2 Press the THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     Thumbnails of the sub clips in the current clip list  appear              0 00       If the clip list you want to edit is not the current clip  list    5 2 Creating Clip Lists    uooaj  s   u  os gJa deyo hh    udl Da ag BUBDg Gg Ja deYyD Wa    Load the clip list from the disc into the unit memory   see page 68      To return to the full screen display  Press the THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  desired sub clip     You can also select sub clips with the following   operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Moves to the  previous or next sub clip    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  button held down
32.   capacity        No Clip     on  limit    A playback or search command was  received for a disc containing no  recorded clips        Disc Top     on    A PREV or reverse high speed search  command was received with the disc  stopped at the top        Disc End     on    A NEXT or forward high speed search  command was received with the disc  stopped at the end     These operations are not possible        TC EXT     on    A time code or user bits preset  command was received with the INT   EXT RP188 switch is set to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch is set to  PRESET           REGEN mode        on       A time code or user bits preset  command was received with the  PRESET REGEN switch is set to  REGEN        Try the operation again after setting the  INT EXT RP188 switch to INT and the  PRESET REGEN switch to PRESET     See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations      page 108  about how to make this setting        8 4 Alarms          Message in time    Display    Description    Action                         was received during recording        data display condition     Live Logg  on  limit A time code or user bit preset operation   Set extended menu item 258    LIVE  was attempted with extended menu item   LOGGING     to    off    before performing the  258    LIVE LOGGING     set to    on     operation   See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations      page 108  about how to make this setting   REC RUN  on A time code or user bits preset Try the operation again after setting the F   c
33.   narow       at the editing stage  then later  for broadcast 2  transmission to select    wide     to output a signal conforming to the standard  K  Note  however  that    narow    has to be always selected for SDI signals   728 OUTPUT SCH PHASE Set the subcarrier H phase            512   512  DEC      0  0  DEC      511  511  DEC            7 3 Extended Menu    105    snuey  Z Ja deyo HA    106    Menu items in the 700s  relating to video control                   Item Item name Settings  number  731 WIDE MODE Specify whether to record and play back with the addition of wide picture  Sub item information   1 INPUT Specify whether to save wide picture information on a disc during recording   auto  Automatically record wide picture information when it is detected in the  selected input video signal   on  Always record wide picture information   off  Do not record wide picture information   2 OUTPUT Specify whether to add wide picture information to the output signal during             MPEG IMX playback    thru  through   Output the video signals of the disc being played back  without adding wide picture information    auto  When wide picture information is detected on the disc being played  back  add wide picture information to the output video signals        To add wide picture information to the output signal  it is necessary  in  addition to setting this item to    thru     to operate extended menu item 703 to  set line 20  in 525 line mode  to    thru    or set line 23  i
34.   or  gt  button to select the digit to replace     e Rotate the jog dial to set a value     5 Press the SET button     The initial time code  LTC  of the current clip list is  set  When the clip list is played back  time code will  start counting from that value     To check the time code after setting it   Press the SUBCLIP button  turning it on  The initial  time code of the current clip list appears in the TCR  field     6 Save the current clip list to disc     See 5 2 6    Saving the Current Clip List to Disc     page  66      5 3 Managing Clip Lists  CLIP Menu        5 3 5 Sorting Clip Lists    Proceed as follows to sort the existing clip lists by clip list  name or by date of creation     1 Display the CLIP menu   See    To display the CLIP menu     page 68      2 Use the 4 or   button to select SORT BY  and then  press the  gt  button     A screen like the one shown below appears        CLIP MENU  SORT BY  gt  name  XNAME  A Z   e DATE NEWEST FIRST              3 Use the 4 or Y button to select NAME or DATE     NAME  Sort in ascending order by clip list name   factory default setting     DATE  Sort by date of creation  with the newest clip  list first     4 Press the  lt  button to return to the CLIP menu screen     The clip lists are sorted by the method you chose in  step 3   Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort        5 4Using PDZ 1 Proxy  Browsing Software    When a computer with the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing  Software installed is connected to this unit  you c
35.  16 H  16 line   17 H  17 line   18 H  18 line   625  line mode   Menu items in the 700s  relating to video control  Item Item name Settings  number  701 SELECTION OF VIDEO SYNC An E E video signal is output delayed with respect to the video input signal by       DELAY       the time for video circuit processing    With this item  select whether or not to delay the sync signal attached to the  output video signal by an amount corresponding to the video signal delay   sync  sync delay   Delay the sync signal by the corresponding amount    before attaching it     video  video delay   Attach a sync signal with the same timing as the input    signal           7 3 Extended Menu    103    an Mh    snuey  Z Ja deyo HA    104    Menu items in the 700s  relating to video control       Item  number    703    Item name    BLANK LINE SELECT       Sub item    Settings    Switch blanking of the video output signal on or off for individual lines in the  vertical blanking interval   The Y C signal and odd even fields are blanked simultaneously        1    ALL LINE          Specify the blanking for each line separately    bink  blank   Regardless of the setting of other sub items  blank all lines  which can be specified in this menu item    thru  throu   Regardless of the setting of other sub items  switch off blanking  for all lines which can be specified in this menu item        LINE 12     LINE 19       LINE 20    In 525 U  line  mode    Specify blanking for lines 12 to 19     bink  blank 
36.  2 2 Using DC Powe          eeeeeeeeseeeeeteee 33  3 2 3 Using a Battery Pack   00    33   3 3 SetU P inidan n dicati oneris ispisna ia naaii 34   3 4 Setting the Date and Time                 34   3 5 Superimposed Text Information       35   3 6 Handling DiSCS          ccctceeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 38  3 6 1 Discs Used for Recording and   Playback rerea 38  3 6 2 Notes on Handling             eee 38  3 6 3 Write Protecting Discs   0 00    38  3 6 4 Loading and Unloading a Disc         38  3 6 5 Formatting a Disc ou    eeeeeeeeeeteeee 39  3 6 6 To Eject Discs With the Unit Powered   Off enepranrudsonung nia naa 39    3 6 7 Handling of Discs When Recording  Does Not End Normally  Salvage    FUNCHON  2c fcc  dee els othe 40       Chapter 4 Recording Playback    4 1 Recording         0ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 42  4 1 1 Preparations for Recording               42  4 1 2 Recording Time Code and User Bit   Values ineng ta 44  4 1 3 Recording Operation    48    4 1 4 Auto Clip List Recording for Automatic  Inclusion of Recorded Clips in Clip    TAS tS svcuinasireltaveersat apieaaceuntenecunneaamdents 48   4 2 Play Dak indecsswivsuausesceasdearentisaninacccintves 49  4 2 1 Preparations for Playback                 49  4 2 2 Playback Operation    51  4 2 3 Thumbnail Search    eee 52  4 2 4 Clip List Playback    eee 54  4 2 5 Repeat Playback    54  4 2 6 Locking and Deleting Clips              55       Chapter 5 Scene Selection    5  OVGIVIGW iiss cassia sccecuindnanaeuduisenunanave
37.  DISC MENU to delete the last clip or all  clips  For details  see page 118     1 With the SUBCLIP button off  press the  THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear     2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the clip  to delete     You can select clips with the following operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Move to the  previous or next clip    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  button held down  Move to the first or last clip    Press the 4     button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switch to the previous or next page     3 With the SHIFT button held down  press the  SUBCLIP button  Or press the MENU button     The THUMBNAIL MENU appears  see step 3 of     Locking clips     page 55       To escape from the THUMBNAIL MENU to the  previous screen  Press the RESET button     4 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select DELETE  CLIP  and then press the SET button     Thumbnails of four frames in the target clip appear    One of the following messages appears in a   confirmation dialog  depending on whether the target   clip is referenced in a clip list    When the target clip is not referenced in a clip list      DELETE CLIP        When the target clip is referenced in a clip list      DELETE CLIP  amp  CLIP LIST      The clip list that  references the clip will also be deleted      MIDDLE1 MIDDLE2  rc         3p Bassas      DELETE CLIP  amp  CLIP LIST     Ton    NAME C0006   TITLE    DATE 23 AUG 14 30 
38.  Display in video panel and on external monitor  Cursor indicating the currently selected item    Group name for the currently selected item            HOUR METER  H01   OPE HOURS   109  H11   OPE HOURS r  109             Display in time data display                Item number  flashing  Setting             1 Press the MENU button     The setup menu appears in the video panel  and on an  external monitor to which the output of the VIDEO  OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER  connector is  input  A cursor indicates the currently selected menu  item    The item number and current setting  elapsed time in  the case of the digital clock  of the currently selected  menu item also appear in the time data display section   The item number flashes to indicate that you can  switch to another item     7 2 Basic Setup Menu          To display the item name in the time data display  Hold down the NEXT button     Rotate the jog dial or shuttle dial to select a menu item     Rotate in the clockwise direction to select higher  numbers  and in the counterclockwise direction to  select lower number  The cursor moves in the direction  of the rotation  the screen scrolls when the cursor  reaches the top or bottom of the screen   The speed at  which the cursor moves and speed with which menu  items change vary with the rotation speed of the jog  dial or the rotation angle of the shuttle dial    The STOP button lights when you select an item that  contains sub items     When the selected item contains su
39.  Flashing             To select the item group  Use the 4    buttons     Press the  gt  button     A lower level menu  item selection screen  appears   The currently selected item is highlighted  and the  arrow        flashes to indication that you can move to  a higher  or lower level menu        Item selection screen    Flashing      MAINTENANCE MENU l        MEZWORK CONFIG N  J  BHCP   dis  gt E      YP ADDRESS 7     SUBNET MASK  DEFAULT GATEWAY  LINK SPEED    auto  DUPLEX z auto                   To return to the item group  Press the  lt  button     To select the menu item  Use the 4   buttons     4 Press the  gt  button     A lower level menu  setting modification screen   appears  The current setting is highlighted  and the  arrow       flashes to indicate that you can move to a  higher level menu  If the current setting is the factory  default  a colon     appears between the item name and  the setting  A midpoint      appears if you change the  factory default setting to another value and then  display the setting modification screen again        Setting modification screen    Flashes       MAINTENANCE MENU  NETWORK CONFIG    N  PHCP dis   x DISABLE   T    Z IA 7 ENABLE             Current setting    Indicates that the current setting is  the factory default  change to          if  the default setting is changed     Indicates a factory default setting             To return to the menu item  Press the  lt  button     When there is a sub item  Repeat steps 3 and 4 unti
40.  GPL LGPL    This product includes software to which the GNU General Public License     GPL     or GNU Lesser General Public License      LGPL     applies  Under the terms of the GPL LGPL  of which a copy is attached  you have the right to obtain  modify   and distribute copies of the source code of this software     Specific instructions for downloading the source code can be found at the following URL   http   www sony net Products Linux     Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code     GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE    Version 2  June 1991   Copyright    1989  1991 Free Software Foundation  Inc    59 Temple Place  Suite 330  Boston  MA 02111 1307 USA   Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document  but changing it is not allowed     Preamble   The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it  By contrast  the GNU  General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software  is free for all its users  This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation   s software and to any  other program whose authors commit to using it   Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU  Library General Public License instead   You can apply it to your programs  too     When we speak of free software  we are referring to freedom  not price  Our General Public Li
41.  How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries   If you develop a new library  and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public  we recommend making it free  software that everyone can redistribute and change  You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms  or   alternatively  under the terms of the ordinary General Public License      To apply these terms  attach the following notices to the library  It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file  to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty  and each file should have at least the    copyright    line and a pointer  to where the full notice is found     Copyright      This library is free software  you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public  License as published by the Free Software Foundation  either version 2 1 of the License  or  at your option  any later  version  This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY  without even the  implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  See the GNU Lesser  General Public License for more details     You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library  if not  write to the  Free Software Foundation  Inc   59 Temple Place  Suite 330  Boston  MA 02111 1307 USA    Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail   You should also get your employer  if you
42.  IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT  SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT   INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED  TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR  BUSINESS INTERRUPTION    HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY   OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE          Part 3  Cambridge Broadband Ltd  copyright notice  BSD           Portions of this code are copyright    2001  Cambridge Broadband Ltd   All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that the following  conditions are met     e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer    e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution    e The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd  may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  without specific prior written permission     THIS SOFTWARE I
43.  Item group       Function Refer to  Items Display of the total number of   page 120  H01 to H15 hours the unit has been   powered on  and other   information collected by the   digital hours meter  Items Settings relating to the preroll   page 90  001 to 099 time  superimposed text   information  switching between   525 U  line  525 J  line and   625 line operation modes  etc   Items Settings relating to the menu  page 93  B01 to B20 banks for saving menu settings             Configuration of the extended setup menu  The extended setup menu comprises the following groups  of items                                         Item group    _  Function Refer to  Items Settings relating to control page 97  100 to 199 panels   Items Settings relating to the remote   page 98  200 to 299 control interface   Items Settings relating to editing page 99  300 to 399 operations   Items Settings relating to preroll page 100  400 to 499   Items Settings relating to disc page 101  500 to 599 protection   Items Settings relating to the time page 101  600 to 699 code  metadata  and UMID   Items Settings relating to video page 103  700 to 799 control   Items Settings relating to audio page 106  800 to 899 control   Items Settings relating to digital page 108  900 to 999 processing          7 1 Menu System Configuration    89       snuey  Z Ja deyo HA    90       7 2 Basic Setup Menu       7 2 1 Items in the Basic Setup Menu    The basic menu items  excluding the items related to the An abbreviated
44.  LITHIUM ION BATTERIES    Lithium lon batteries are recyclable   You can help preserve our environment  by returning your used rechargeable  batteries to the collection and recycling  location nearest you        For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable  batteries  call toll free 1 800 822 8837  or visit  http  Awww rbrc org     Caution  Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium ion  batteries     For the customers in Europe   This product with the CE marking complies with both the EMC  Directive  89 336 EEC  and the Low Voltage Directive  73 23   EEC  issued by the Commission of the European Community   Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  following European standards    e EN60065  Product Safety   e EN55103 1  Electromagnetic Interference  Emission    e EN55103 2  Electromagnetic Susceptibility  Immunity   This product is intended for use in the following  Electromagnetic Environment s     E1  residential   E2  commercial and light industrial   E3   urban outdoors  and E4  controlled EMC environment  ex  TV  studio      WARNING   Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones  can cause hearing loss    In order to use this product safely  avoid prolonged listening at  excessive sound pressure levels     Voor de Klanten in Nederland   e Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in als klein  chemisch afval  KCA     e Dit apparaat bevat een vast ingebouwde batterij die niet  vervangen hoeft te worden tijdens de levensduur van het  
45.  Right switch   Line 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  mode   525 60   OFF    OFF  ON  OFF  OFF ON  ON  625 50  ON    OFF  ON  OFF  OFF ON  ON  PVE 500    No settings required              3 2 Power Preparations    This unit can be powered by a battery pack  DC power  or  AC power        3 2 1 Using AC Power    Connect an AC power source  100 V to 240 V AC  50 60  Hz  to the   AC IN connector on the right side of the unit  with an AC power cord  not supplied  see page 133         3 2 2 Using DC Power    Connect a DC power source to the DC IN 12V connector  on the right side of the unit        3 2 3 Using a Battery Pack    Usable battery packs    The battery packs usable with this unit are as follows   BP GL95  BP GL65  BP L80S  BP L60S    To attach a battery pack    Proceed as follows     T Remove the cover of the battery pack shoe                                To remove the battery pack   Follow the above procedure in the reverse flow  After the  battery pack is removed  replace the cover of the battery  pack shoe     When several power sources are  connected    The following table shows the automatically selected  power source that drives this unit                       Power types Power that  AC power   DC power Battery pack ae ame  Connected  Connected   Mounted AC power 2   Connected  Connected    AC power 2   Connected    Mounted AC power  gt      Connected   Mounted DC power                       a  Switches to DC power immediately if AC power supply is interrupted    b  Switches to b
46.  Signal input to this unit and signal output from this unit  are stopped        6 2 2 Operating on Files       Start Explorer     Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit    The drive letter will differ depending on the number  of other peripherals connected to the remote  computer      2 Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc  loaded in this unit     You can operate in the same way that you operate on  local drives and files on network computers     e If you power this unit off during an FAM    connection  the data transferred thus far is discarded     e All file operations are not possible for some types of  files     For details  see 6 1 2    File Operation Restrictions      page 73      To eject discs from a remote computer  Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer  and  select Eject from the menu which appears        6 2 3 Exiting File Operations    Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3     1 Do one of the following on the Ea or W5 icon  displayed in the remote computer   s taskbar     e Double click    e Right click  and select one of the following  commands from the menu which appears     Windows 2000  Unplug or eject hardware    Windows XP  Safely Remove Hardware    e Windows 2000  The Unplug or Eject Hardware  dialog appears    e Windows XP  The Safely Remove Hardware dialog  appears     2 Select    Sony XDCAM PDW R1 IEEE 1394 SBP2  Device    and click Stop     The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears 
47.  TEMP  on  limit  off Temperatures have risen within the unit    this state will result in rising temperatures   High TEMP  on  limit  off Temperatures have risen within a drive    in the unit or drive  with the risk of fire or    damage to the unit        a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    8 4 Alarms                   Appendixes                Specifications    General    Power requirements  100 V to 240 V AC  50 60 Hz  DC  battery  Power consumption  AC  37W  DC or battery  31W  Peak inrush current   1 Power ON  current probe method  65  A  240 V   30 A  100 V    2 Hot switching inrush current   measured in accordance with  European standard EN55103 1  35 A   230 V   Operating temperature  0  C to 40  C  32  F to 104  F   Storage temperature     20  C to  60  C   4  F to  140  F   Operating relative humidity  20  to 90   Mass 4 7 kg  10 lb 5 oz   External dimensions  w h d  excluding projections   230 x 105 x 340mm   91 g x 41 4 x 131 3 inches                                                                                                                                                                                               105  4 1 4   OHJ  1 H 1s  G a 3 2  2 Os  s le    g  o    J  al  QS G  230  9 1 8   oo i  Unit  mm  inches   System    Recording Playback format    Video MPEG IMX  50 40 30 Mbps   DVCAM   25 Mbps   Proxy video  MPEG 4       Audio MPEG IMX  16 bits 48 kHz  8 channels     or 24 bits 48 kHz  4 channels   DVCAM  16 bits 48 kHz  4 chann
48.  UB  and COUNTER    TC  The playback time code read by the internal time code  reader  or the time code generated by the internal time  code generator    Make the TC or VITC selection in extended menu item  629    TC SELECT      UB  The user bits inserted in the playback time code  or    user bits generated by the internal time code generator     Make the UB or VIUB selection in extended menu  item 629    TC SELECT       COUNTER  The elapsed recording playback time  hours   minutes  seconds  frames   This can be reset by  pressing the RESET button  see page 14     The corresponding indicator above the time data display   lights according to the setting     You can also synchronize timecode with the time of the  internal clock  For details  see    To set time code to the  time of the internal clock     page 45         HOLD button   Press this button to stop the time code generator   Also  when setting the time code or user bits to be  recorded  press this button first  to hold the values     Operating mode selection menu setting  section         SUBCLIP button     THUMBNAIL button     SHIFT button    UB   THUMB  IP NAIL         SHIFT    On  r                            ESSENCE  MARK    CLI   EN   MENU SET RESET  TEM   MENU    M  E  r  is  sys S SEL   RESET button      SET button  MENU button                                        SUBCLIP button   To play back following a clip list  press this button  turning  it on  see page 54   This is also effective for jog and shuttle  ope
49.  and     MARK2 button             To start playback   Press the PLAY button    Playback starts    When two or more clips are recorded on the disc  they are  played back continuously     No audio is output when non audio signals are played  back     To jump to the next or previous clip  then start  playback   Use the PREV button  NEXT button  jog dial  or shuttle  dial     For information about the functions of these buttons  see     5 Recording and playback control section    on page 16   For details of the jog and shuttle dials  see    3 Jog shuttle  control block    on page 14     To stop playback  Press the STOP button     If you play back to the end of the last clip  Playback automatically stops    If  in this state  you press the PLAY button  the message     ALARM DISC END     appears on the monitor    To carry out playback again  move back to the desired clip  using the PREV button  jog dial or shuttle dial     To record an essence mark   While playing back a disc  you can record essence marks  such as shot mark 1 and shot mark 2 in desired frames   To record a shot mark 1 or shot mark 2  hold down the 4   MARKI  or   MARK2 button and press the SET button     To erase or change essence marks  use the supplied  PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software     Playback in jog mode    In jog mode  you can control the speed of playback by the  speed of turning the jog dial  The playback speed range is     times normal speed    To carry out playback in jog mode  proceed as follows         
50.  cable  before  unplugging the i LINK cable  first power off the device  and disconnect the power plug from the outlet  If the  i LINK cable is unplugged with the device power plug  still connected  a current from an excessive voltage  8 to  40 V  output from the i LINK connector of the device  flows into the PDW R1  This may cause a failure of the  PDW R1    When connecting the PDW R1 to a device with a 6 pin  i LINK connector  connect to the 6 pin i LINK  connector of the other device first    Except in playback mode  jog and shuttle modes  etc    if  you are monitoring the audio signal output from this  connector on another device  the audio signal may sound  differently from the audio signal played back on the  PDW R1      1  Digital audio signal inputs outputs         DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  IN 1 2  3 4 connectors      DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU   OUT 1 2  3 4 connectors                     DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  IN  digital audio  input  1 2  3 4 connectors  BNC type    These input AES EBU format digital audio signals  The   left connector  1 2  corresponds to audio channels 1 and 2    and the right connector  3 4  corresponds to audio   channels 3 and 4        DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  OUT  digital audio  output  1 2  3 4 connectors  BNC type   These output AES EBU format digital audio signals   When the unit is shipped from the factory  the 1 2  connector is set to audio channel 1 2  and the 3 4 connector  is set to audio channel 3 4  You can change these settings  with ex
51.  connector                           To composite video    input connector    VIDEO OUT 2    REF VIDEO  IN  SUPER                                                        RECORDER                75 Q coaxial cable  not supplied   iam      9 pin remote control cable  not supplied      b gt              Cable with XLR connectors  not supplied      C  it                   Video monitor       To composite video input connector                         REF  VIDEO    INPUT SDI INPUT                                                   i ji  A                                                                                      REMOTE SDI OUT  SUPER    Ke  E J  PDW R1  player  REMOTE 1 IN  9P   COMPOSITE VIDEO MSW M2000 M2000P  OUTPUT 3  SUPER   recorder                PLAYER 1             BVE 700  Reference video signal    PDW R1  player  settings  Remote control switch  see page 12   REMOTE  Extended menu item 214    REMOTE INTERFACE     9PIN    Extended menu item 820    AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 CH2 SELECT      moni       a  Use an XLR pin converter plug  not supplied  as required        REF VIDEO IN    MSW M2000 M2000P  recorder  settings  REMOTE 1 9P  button  Lit    For details about the settings of the MSW M2000 M2000P  refer  to the operation manual for the unit           3 1 Connections and Settings    29    suoneied  ld    Ja deyo                          suoesedaid       Ja deyo                          30    When using the editing functions of the recorder       Connections using the REM
52.  during disc loading unloading  and when no disc is inserted  select whether or not to control the output  signal PB EE setting    on  Do not control  the signal is always an E E signal     off  Control        114    AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT LEVEL    When    moni    is selected in menu item 820  select whether or not to  control the level of the audio signal output from the AUDIO OUT 1 3  2 4  connectors with the volume control knob for the PHONES jack    var  variable   Control    fixed  Do not control        118    KEY INHIBIT       Sub item    When the KEY INHI switch is set to ON  select which buttons can be  operated  The following sub items control different sets of buttons  independently        1 MON  INPUT SEL    Select whether the AUDIO MONITOR SEL  the AUDIO METER SEL  the  AUDIO INPUT CH  and the VIDEO INPUT SEL buttons are enabled   dis  Disabled    ena  Enabled        2 CONTROL PANEL       Select whether all switches and buttons other than the buttons specified  with sub item 1 and the MENU button are enabled    dis  Disabled    ena  Enabled        121          FRAME PB MODE       Specify the frame mode for variable speed playback    field  Field playback   frame  Frame playback  Compared to field playback  frame playback  gives still pictures with higher precision           7 3 Extended Menu    97    arial NM    snuey  Z Ja deyo HA    Menu items in the 100s  relating to the control panels       Item number  131    Item name  AUDIO VOLUME    Settings    Select whethe
53.  for the  next file transfer  for data transfer from     h1  most significant byte  to h4  least significant byte   IP  this unit   address  e p1  most significant byte   p2  least significant byte   Port  address  Input example  PORT 10 0 0 1 242 48   IP address  10 0 0 1  Port number  62000   PASV This command requests this unit to PASV  lt CRLF gt      listen    on a data port  which is not its  default data port    It puts this unit into  passive mode  waiting for the remote  computer to make a data connection    TYPE Specifies the type of data to be TYPE  lt SP gt   lt type code  options delimited by  lt SP gt   gt      lt CRLF gt      lt type code gt  can be any of the following  However  for  XDCAM  data is always transferred as    I     regardless of the  type code specification   e A  ASCII    N  Non print    T  Telnet format    C  ASA Carriage Control  e E  EBCDIC    N  Non print    T  Telnet format    C  ASA Carriage Control  e    IMAGE  Binary   default   e L  LOCAL BYTE    SIZE  byte size    Input example  TYPE         6 3 FTP File Operations          Command name  STRU    Description  Specifies the data structure     Command syntax  STRU  lt SP gt   lt structure code gt   lt CRLF gt      lt structure code gt  can be any of the following  However  for  XDCAM  the structure is always    F regardless of the  structure code specification    e F  File structure  default    e R  Record structure   e P  Page structure    Input example  STRU F                   MODE Spe
54.  including the  General directory    e Deletion and renaming of directories       The maximum number of files which can be created on  a disc  including directories  is 5 000    e File names and directory names can use letters  numbers   and ao from the Unicode 2 0  UTF 8  character  set    However  the following control characters and symbols  cannot be used      Control characters  U 0000 to U 001F  U 007F     Symbols              lt    gt               1  This is supported from firmware version 1 4  However  the following  character codes cannot be used by FAM connections   U 010000  U 020000  U 030000  U 040000  U 050000  U 060000   U 070000  U 080000  U 090000  U 0A0000  U 0B0000  U 0C0000   U 0D0000  U 0E0000  U 0F0000  U 100000   There are no limits to characters which can be used by FTP connections         6 1 3 Assigning User Defined Clip  Titles    By default  clips on each disc are assigned names in the  range CO001 MXF to C4999 MXF  For this reason  two  discs can contain clips with the same names  The  automatic title generation function allows you to assign  titles to all of the clips on several discs  which facilitates  clip management  For example  if the titles TITLEO0001 to  TITLE00020 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to  C0020 MXF on disc 1  then the titles TITLE00021 to  TITLE00037 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to  C0017 MXF on disc 2                C0020 MXF              f  a m f  TITLE00020   rri   00002  TITLE00001              C0017 MXF   mn  6  TITLE
55.  installation of the executable  However  as a special  exception  the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed  in either source or binary  form  with the major components  compiler  kernel  and so on  of the operating system on which the executable runs   unless that component itself accompanies the executable     If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place  then offering  equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code  even though  third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code     You may not copy  modify  sublicense  or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License  Any  attempt otherwise to copy  modify  sublicense or distribute the Program is void  and will automatically terminate your  rights under this License    However  parties who have received copies  or rights  from you under this License will not have their licenses  terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance     You are not required to accept this License  since you have not signed it  However  nothing else grants you permission  to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works  These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept  this License  Therefore  by modifying or distributing the Program  or any work based on the Program   you indicate  your acceptance of this L
56.  it again   DRV ADJ err on  limit  off Adjustment processing failed when a er insenanetherdise              disc was inserted           a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    During playback                      of a disc defect        Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition      525 60 Disc on  limit An attempt was made to play back a disc   Use a disc recorded with the PAL system   recorded with the NTSC system when  this unit is in 625 line mode  PAL  system     625 50 Disc on  limit An attempt was made to play back a disc   Use a disc recorded with the NTSC  recorded with the PAL system when this   system   unit is in 525 U  or 525 J  line mode   NTSC system     Disc Error  on  limit  off Normal playback is not possible because   Use another disc     You can check the state of a disc by  checking playback condition marks  see  page 36         a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    During control panel operations                      Message in time   Display Description Action  data display condition     KEY INHI   on An operation button inhibited by Set the corresponding sub item of  extended menu item 118    KEY INHIBIT      extended menu item 118 to    off      was pressed while the KEY INH  indicator was lit  See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations      page 108  about how to make this setting   REMOTE  on A button was pressed while the remote   To operate from the front panel  wait until  control switch was set 
57.  list playback starts from the first sub  clip in the clip list     To start repeat playback from the device  connected to the REMOTE connector   Set extended menu item 142    REPEAT MODE    to    play      and then send a repeat playback command from the  external device     For details of commands  refer to REMOTE  9 pin   Protocol Manual for the PDW series     To stop repeat playback   Do one of the following    e Operate any of the playback buttons except the PLAY  button  or operate the jog or shuttle dial    e From the external device connected to the REMOTE  connector on this unit  send a command other than the  repeat playback start command to this unit     The unit executes the operation for the button press  jog or  search dial operation  or remote command that stops  playback   The unit enters search mode when you conduct  a search  and stop mode at the end of the disc      To disable repeat playback  Set extended menu item 142    REPEAT MODE    to    off           4 2 6 Locking and Deleting Clips    In the thumbnail screen  you can delete selected clips or  lock them so that they cannot be deleted        1  This is supported from firmware version 1 5     Locking clips  Locking prevents the following operations on clips     e Deletion  e Renaming by FAM or FTP    e Locked clips are erased along with other clips when you  format a disc    e Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write  Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled  position  or when 
58.  lt     P                                                        wore rev Ur FWD J eno          gt  OUT button  4   buttons          1 Display the CLIP menu     See    To display the CLIP menu     page 68      Use the 4 or     button to move the cursor to SAVE  and  then press the  gt  button     A list of clip lists appears      NEW FILE    is displayed for clip lists without any  registered data     The date of creation or the title is displayed for each  clip list        CLIP MENU  SAVE  E0001 04 08 08 21 57  E0002 04 08 24 11 15  E0003 04 08 25 15 30  e E0004 NEW FILE  gt   E0005 NEW FILE  E0006 NEW FILE  E0007 NEW FILE  E0008 NEW FILE  E0009 NEW FILE  TITLE   SHIFT SET KEY          To switch between display of dates of creation   titles  and clip list names   With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button    With each press  the display changes as follows   Dates of creation  gt  titles  gt  clip list names  gt  dates of  creation       Use the  amp  or   button or the jog dial to select the  desired clip list  and then press the  gt  button     A confirmation message like the one shown below  appears        SAVE CLIP LIST    SAVE E0005 OK      SAVE   SET KEY  TO MENU   MENU KEY             To cancel the save  Press the MENU button     Press the SET button     The current clip list is saved to disc     To assign a title to a clip list  Use the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software     For details  see the PDZ 1 online help     5 2 Creating Clip Lists    67    uo
59.  name appears in the time data display   digital hours meter  are listed in the following table  section when you press the NEXT button    e Item names are the names which appear in the video e The values in the Settings column are the values which  panel and on an external monitor  when the input signals appear in the time data display section   The values may  to the monitor are the video signals output from the appear in a different format in the video panel and on an    VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER     connector     external monitor  In this case  the video panel values are  shown in parentheses   Underlined values are the factory  defaults        Item number  001    Item name  PREROLL TIME    Settings    0 s  0 sec     5 s  5 sec     30 s  30 sec   Set the preroll time to between 0  and 30 seconds in steps of 1 second   A preroll time of at least 5 seconds is recommended when using this  unit for editing        002    CHARACTER H POSITION    Adjust the horizontal screen position  as a hexadecimal value  of the text   information displayed on the monitor  a    00    OA    2A  525 U  525 J  line modes   00    09    29  625 line mode    The hexadecimal value 00 is for the far left of the screen  Increasing the  value moves the position of the characters to the right     a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector     Set this item by adjusting to the re
60.  names in the standard format        1  This is supported from firmware version 1 5     Limitations   e Letters  numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0   character set can be used    However  the following control characters and symbols   cannot be used      Control characters  U 0000 to U 001F  U 007F     Symbols               lt    gt            Depending on the character type  the length of user    defined names  the    C     or    E E01    part  may be   limited to 14 characters   The limit for ASCII characters   is 56 characters     All file name extensions are converted automatically to   uppercase    Titles are used as user defined clip names on this unit    Therefore  the available characters are limited to those   supported by the title function    Files generated along with clips and clip lists use the   same names  the    C     or    E     part of the following file   names       Clips  Metadata files  C MO1 XML   proxy AV data  files  C SO1 MXF      Clip lists  Metadata files  E M01 XML    The following names cannot be assigned      Clips C0000 MXF     Clip lists  E0000E01 SMI  EO100E01 SMI to  E9999E01 SMI  E0000 SMI  E0100 SMI to  E9999 SMI   The following names should be avoided      Clips  C5000 MXF to C9999 MXF     Clip lists  E0001 SMI to E0099 SMI    To assign clip names on this unit  The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name  file  name      e When the first letter of the title setting with basic menu  item 035    CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT    is a 
61.  not supplied        To SDI IN 1 IN 2 connector    LMD 9030 LCD monitor                3 1 2 Connections for Using PDZ 1  Proxy Browsing Software    Using the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software  you  can carry out simple editing with proxy AV data     For an overview of PDZ 1 and how to install the software   see 5 4    Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software    on page    3 1 Connections and Settings 25    suoeredaid E Ja deyo                          26    71   For information about how to use the software  refer to the  Help provided in the software     Using the   network  connector  FTP  connection     The following shows an example of an FTP  File Transfer  Protocol  connection     To use PDZ 1 requires the PDW R1 IP address and other  network related settings to be made beforehand     For details of the network related settings  see    To change  network settings     page 115            Connecting this unit directly to a laptop computer       Network cable  not supplied                          TERSTE REF VEOT        eure       oe  ei 60    wz  network  connector                                                                      To network connector    Laptop computer    Make sure the remote control switch  see page 12  is set to     NETWORK    and extended menu item 257    NETWORK  ENABLE     is set to    net        a  Use a cross cable        Connecting three PDW R1 units to a laptop computer via a  LAN        Network cable  not supplied           wz  network  conn
62.  of files on the disc had  reached the upper limit  5000   or there  was not enough capacity in the General  directory when a command was  received to record  display an E E  picture  record an essence mark  or add  a quick scene selection sub clip        Disc Full     on  limit  off    A command was received to record or  display an E E picture when there was  not enough free capacity on the disc  or  when the number of recorded clips had  reached the upper limit  300      Exchange the disc for one with enough  free capacity        MAX  SB CLP    on  limit  off    A command was received to add a sub  clip when the number of registered sub  clips had already reached the upper limit   300  of the specifications of this unit        CL OVER DUR    on  limit  off    A command was received to add a sub  clip when the total duration of sub clips  in the clip list had already reached the  upper limit  24 hours  of the  specifications of this unit     These operations are not possible        Disc Damage    on  limit  off    A command was received to record   display an E E picture  record an  essence mark  or add a quick scene  selection sub clip when there was no  free sparing area     This disc cannot be recorded  Exchange  the disc        Non AV Full    on  limit  off    A command was received to record   display an E E picture  record an  essence mark  or add a quick scene  selection sub clip when there was no  free Non Real Time space     Insert a different disc with enough free
63.  optional  if the application does not supply it  the square root function must still compute square  roots      These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole  If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from  the Library  and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves  then this License  and  its terms  do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works  But when you distribute the same  sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library  the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of  this License  whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole  and thus to each and every part  regardless of who wrote it     Thus  it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you  rather   the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library     In addition  mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library  or with a work based on the    Library  on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    141    ee HA    sex pueddy AM    142    You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy  of the Library  To do this  you must alter all the notices that refe
64.  or rights  from you under this License will not have their licenses  terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance     You are not required to accept this License  since you have not signed it  However  nothing else grants you permission  to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works  These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept  this License  Therefore  by modifying or distributing the Library  or any work based on the Library   you indicate your  acceptance of this License to do so  and all its terms and conditions for copying  distributing or modifying the Library  or works based on it     Each time you redistribute the Library  or any work based on the Library   the recipient automatically receives a  license from the original licensor to copy  distribute  link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and  conditions  You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients    exercise of the rights granted herein  You  are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License     If  as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason  not limited to    patent issues   conditions are imposed on you  whether by court order  agreement or otherwise  that contradict the  conditions of this License  they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License  If you cannot distribute so as    Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    143    e
65.  out   Output the audio channel signals selected with item 824     just as they are    from the AUDIO OUT 1 3 and 2 4 connectors    moni  monitor out   Output the monitor audio L channel  CH 1  and   monitor audio R channel  CH 2  signals from the AUDIO OUT 1 3 and   AUDIO OUT 2 4 connectors  respectively           7 3 Extended Menu          Menu items in the 800s  relating to audio control       Item number  823                   Item name Settings  NON AUDIO FLAG PB Control non audio flags in digital audio output   Sub item  1 CH1 CH2 During playback  except E E mode   set non audio flags in digital audio  output to the following states   2 CH3 CH4 on  Set to on  data is non audio   3 CH5 CH6 auto  Set as follows   4 CH7 CH8 e When data is read from disc and confirmed  Follow the data   e When data from disc is not confirmed  Maintain current state           824    ANALOG LINE OUTPUT SELECT    Select the analog audio signals  tracks 1 to 8  to be assigned to audio  output channels 1 and 2    tr1 2  Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr3 4  Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr5 6  Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr7 8  Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2     When item 820 is set to    moni     the left channel  CH 1  and right  channel  CH 2  of monitor audio are output from the AUDIO OUT 1 3  and 2 4 connectors respectively  regardless of the setting of this item        827    A
66.  patents  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of  a free program will individually obtain patent licenses  in effect making the program proprietary  To prevent this  we have    made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone   s free use or not licensed at all     The precise terms and conditions for copying  distribution and modification follow     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    135    ere A    sex pueddy AM    136    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING  DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION    0     This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it   may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License  The    Program     below  refers to any such program  or work  and a    work based on the Program    means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law   that is to say  a work containing the Program or a portion of it  either verbatim or with modifications and or translated  into another language   Hereinafter  translation is included without limitation in the term       modification           Each licensee is addressed as    you        Activities other than copying  distribution and modification are not covered by this License  they are outside its scope   The act of running the Program is not restricted  and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents  constitute a work based on the Program  indepen
67.  position of the disc when it was most  recently ejected    Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the most  recent position    The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is  ejected  which allows playback to start at that position  whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player     This function is not available when the Write Inhibit tab of  the disc is set to the recording disabled position  and when  extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to    on      The REC INHI indicator may light when neither of the  above are true if the format of recorded sections on the disc  is not the same as the recording settings of this unit  In this  case  the playback position can be saved to the disc        4 2 1 Preparations for Playback    Button switch settings    Before beginning playback  make any necessary button   switch settings     For details of the settings of the buttons switches  see the  pages indicated in parenthesis                                                                                                     Remote control switch  page 12   Set to LOCAL        On standby switch  page 12   Indicator      lit green        VARIABLE switch  page 15  and ALL CH 1  CH   2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs  page 15   Adjust the audio playback levels        AUDIO MONITOR SEL button  page 15   Select the audio channels to monitor        AC power switch  rear panel   page 11    Set to the I  on  position    If you are using DC power or a battery pack  connect th
68.  press the SET button    To recall menu bank 4  select    bank 4    under menu item  B20    RESET SETUP MENU        Refer to the maintenance manual for more information  about menu bank 4     7 2 Basic Setup Menu             Recall  Current active  menu settings Savs Menu bank 1       Recall  Save Menu bank 2  Recall  Menu bank 3  Recall  Menu bank 4                The following message appears if the line mode of the  menu bank that you are about to recall differs from the  current line mode        Display in the video panel and on an external monitor       ITEM BO1  RECALL SETUP BANK 1  System will be changed   Are you sure you want    to execute     EXECUTE   SET KEY  ABORT   MENU KEY          Message in time data display                         Press the SET button to recall the settings and switch to the  line mode saved in the menu bank  When you power the  unit off and then on again  it will use the line mode and  settings of the selected bank    To cancel the recall  press the MENU button        7 3 Extended Menu       7 3 1 Items in the Extended Menu    The following tables show the items in the extended menu    e Item names are the names which appear in the video  panel  and on an external monitor to which the output of  the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER     connector is input     An abbreviated name appears in the time data display    section when you press the NEXT button     e The values in the Settings columns are the values which  appear in the time data d
69.  return the  screw to its original position  Normal operation will  resume when the unit is powered on again     3 Close the rubber cover firmly        3 6 7 Handling of Discs When  Recording Does Not End  Normally  Salvage Function     Recording processing does not end normally when the  primary power   of this unit is lost during recording   Because the file system is not updated  video and audio  data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip  contents recorded up to that point are lost    However  this unit has a salvage function which can hold  losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such  discs    Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the on   standby switch on the control panel is set to standby   because the unit does not enter standby mode until after the  end of recording processing     1  Primary power is lost when the AC power switch on the rear panel is  turned off  the AC power cord is disconnected  DC power is turned off  the  battery pack is exhausted  the battery pack is removed  and so on     3 6 Handling Discs    Do not turn this unit   s primary power off until recording   processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has   gone out    This function salvages as much recorded material as   possible after an unforeseen accident  but 100    restoration cannot be guaranteed    Even when this function is used  it is not possible to   recover data from immediately before the interruption of   recording  The amount of data 
70.  screen returns to the normal screen if no operation is  done for 30 seconds    e The process control screen does not appear if either  of the following is true      The unit is being controlled from a device  connected to the REMOTE connector  and basic  menu item 006    LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE     is set to    dis    or    st amp ej         The unit is connected to a computer by FAM or  FTP  and the computer is logged in to this unit     To check the assignments to buttons which  select parameters    50   4 2 Playback    A list of button assignments appears at the bottom of  the screen when you keep the MENU button pressed           PROCESS CONTROL U    VIDEO UAR          1         CHROMA VAR          1           BLACK PRE              1         CHROMA Ph PRE      1       SYNC Ph PRE              1           SC Ph PRE 000    PREV   VIDEO  PLAY   CHROMA      lt    SYS Ph    gt    SC Ph    NEXT   SETUP or BLACK  STOP   CHROMA Ph                List of parameters assigned to buttons             2 Holddown the following buttons and press the RESET  button to select    PRE     PRESET  factory preset  setting  or    VAR     VARIABLE  adjustable setting    Each press of the button switches between    PRE    and     VAR                          Button   Parameter Adjustment range a   PREV  Video output level  512 to 0 to 511  PLAY  Chroma output level     512 to O to 511  NEXT   Setup black level    512 to 0 to 511  STOP   Chroma phase    128 to 0 to 127   lt a Output signal sync    
71.  second clip is recorded    The maximum number of clips that can be recorded is  300  If the loaded disc already contains 300 clips   recording with the REC button is not possible   The  message    Disc Full     appears in the time data display      4 1 Recording    Do not allow the unit   s primary power to be lost during  recording  1  This could cause the clip being recorded to  be lost   See 3 6 7    Handling of Discs When Recording  Does Not End Normally  Salvage Function     on page  40      1  Primary power is lost when the AC power switch on the rear panel is  turned off  the AC power cord is disconnected  DC power is turned off  the  battery pack is exhausted  the battery pack is removed  and so on     To record essence marks    A shot mark 1 essence mark or shot mark 2 essence mark  is recorded if you hold down the 4 MARK1 or    MARK2  button and press the SET button during recording        4 1 4 Auto Clip List Recording for  Automatic Inclusion of  Recorded Clips in Clip Lists    Auto clip list recording is a function for automatically  including the clips generated by recording operations in a  selected clip list  The updated clip list is saved to the disc   Proceed as follows     1 Insert a disc     2 Loada clip list from the disc     e To create a new clip list  load a NEW FILE  empty   clip list   e To add clips to an existing clip list  load that clip list     For operations  see 5 3 1    Loading a Clip List From  Disc Into Unit Memory     page 68      3 Press
72.  setup  7 5   to the output analog video signals   0 0   Do not add   7 5   Add   The factory default settings for each line mode are as follows   525 U  line mode  7 5   525 J  line mode  0 0   723 INPUT VIDEO BLANK Switch blanking on or off for individual lines in the vertical blanking interval of  Sub item an input video signal  The Y C signal and odd even fields are blanked  simultaneously   A signal with blanking carried out according to this setting is recorded   1 ALL LINE       Specify the blanking for each line separately   bink  blank   Regardless of the setting of other sub items  blank all lines  which can be specified in this menu item   thru  throu   Regardless of the setting of other sub items  switch off blanking  for all lines which can be specified in this menu item   2     LINE 12    In 525 U   Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20   10 LINE 20 525 J  line bink  blank   Carry out blanking   modes thru  throu   Switch off blanking   2     LINE 9  322  In 625 line Specify blanking for lines 9  322 to 22  335     15 ii mode bink  blank   Carry out blanking     LINE 22  335 thru  throu   Switch off blanking     726 H BLANKING WIDTH Select the horizontal blanking width of the output analog video signal  Q  narow  narrow   Digital blanking  narrow  S  wide  Analog blanking  wide  2  When    wide    is selected  the horizontal blanking width complies with RS170A     and normally the blanking is widened and the image becomes narrower  It is    recommended to select  
73.  shuttle  dial to the center position  or press the STOP button     When extended menu item 101    SELECTION FOR  SEARCH DIAL ENABLE     is set to    dial     factory default  setting   just turning the shuttle dial with the SHUTTLE  button off starts playback in shuttle mode     To alternate between normal speed playback and  shuttle mode playback   Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the  desired shuttle playback speed  then switch between  normal speed playback and shuttle playback by pressing  the PLAY and SHUTTLE buttons alternately    For intermittent shuttle mode playback  press the STOP  and SHUTTLE buttons alternately        4 2 3 Thumbnail Search    Cuing up a desired clip    To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc   and cue up a desired clip  proceed as follows     4 2 Playback    Sixth clip is  selected from a  total of 143 clips     Name of currently  selected clip       Thumbnail of currently selected clip   first frame or specified       frame        DUR 00 03 10 00       23 AUG 14 30    Recording date and  time of selected clip    Duration of selected clip or  time code of first frame    a  When a title has been assigned to a clip  see page 75   the title  is enclosed in double quotation marks  for example     TITLE00001       b  The thumbnail frame can be specified by a menu selection  when the clip is recorded  see page 98               To switch between duration and time code display  in the thumbnail display   Press the C
74.  slots at the left side and right  side panels  and vents of the fans    e Leave a space around the unit for ventilation    e Leave more than 40 cm of space in the rear of the unit to  secure the operation area    When the unit is installed on the desk or the like  leave at least   4 cm of space in the left and right sides    Leaving 40 cm or more of space above the unit is   recommended for service operation     CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT  LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE  KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT                This Professional Disc Recorder is classified as a CLASS 1  LASER PRODUCT     Laser diode properties  Wavelength  403 to 410 nm  Emission duration  Continuous  Laser output power  65 mW  max  of pulse peak   35 mW   max  of CW     Tekniska data for laserdiod  Vaglangd  403 till 410 nm  Emissionslangd  Kontinuerlig  Laseruteffekt  65 mW  max  f  r pulstopp   35 mW  max  f  r  kontinuerlig vag     Spesifikasjoner laserdiode  B  lgelengde  403 til 410 nm  Stralingens varighet  Kontinuerlig  Laserens effekt  65 mW  maks straletoppunkt   35 mW   maks ved kontinuerlig straling     Laserdiodin ominaisuudet  Aallon pituus  403   410 nm  Valityksen kesto  Jatkuva  Laserlahd6n teho  65 mW  sykehuipun maks    35 mW   jatkuvan aallon maks         P       LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN   DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM    CLASS 1M LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN    DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS    RADIATIONS LASER DE CLASSE 1M EN CAS D OUVERTURE    ATTENTI ie  N NE PAS REGARDER DIR
75.  surface  This includes fingerprints  dust from the air  tar from  cigarette smoke  and so on   Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are  not a problem because they are registered in advance as  defects  and recording avoids them  However  scratches  and soiling which occur after recording can lead to  deteriorating playback conditions   e Aging of disc recording layers  Over several decades  the recording layers of optical  discs can age and cause deteriorating playback  conditions   You can use this function to check archival discs and  other discs which have been stored for extended periods   so that you can take action before the deterioration  progresses further     e Deteriorating laser diodes performance  The performance of the laser diodes used in optical  heads can worsen with age  leading to deteriorating  playback conditions   You can use the digital clock to check the total optical  output time of optical heads     For details  see 8 1 1    Digital Hours Meter     page 120   about this setting    Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate  guide to when it is time to replace optical heads     To prevent playback conditions from  deteriorating    Pay attention to the following points when handling discs     e Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with  your hands    e Do not store for long periods in locations which are  dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans    e Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or  in 
76.  termed    menu banks    numbered 1 to 4   Saved sets of menu settings can be recalled for use as  required     For more information about the menu banks  see    Menu  bank operations  menu items BOI to B13      page 96  and  the description of maintenance menu item    SETUP  MAINTENANCE           SETUP BANK4     page 113      3 3 Setup   3 4 Setting the Date and Time       3 4 Setting the Date and  Time    When using this unit for the first time  you should set the  date and time as follows                                fF  a    2 aaa p  z  EPPP                                                                                        1 Holding down the SHIFT button  press the MENU  button     The system menu appears on the video panel     2 Select    DATE TIME PRESET    using the 4 button or     button  then press the  gt  button     The date and time setting screen appears on the  monitor  allowing you to set the following items    e YEAR  Calendar year   e MONTH  Month   e DAY  Day   e TIME  Time      TIME ZONE  Time zone  Difference from UTC     3 Set the date  time and time zone     You can change the setting of the flashing digits     To change the flashing digits  Use the arrow buttons   lt    gt       To increase or decrease the values of the flashing  digits  Use the arrow buttons  4  Y  or jog dial     4 Press the SET button     The date  time and time zone settings are stored     To return to the previous menu page  Press the MENU button     To exit the menu  Press t
77.  the SUBCLIP button  turning it on     The unit enters auto clip list recording mode  and the  number of the clip list which is loaded in the current  clip list appears     4 Press the REC button to start recording     A clip is generated automatically from the video and  audio recorded in the interval from start to stop of  recording  and added as a sub clip to the current clip  list  When recording stops  the updated clip list is  written to disc     5 Repeat the process of recording and stopping until you  have included all the required clips   To change the registered clip list  repeat step 2 to load  the desired clip list     To exit auto clip list recording mode  Press the SUBCLIP button  turning it off        4 2 Playback    This section describes playback of video and audio     Disc playback start position    Although this unit uses optical discs  it is designed to offer  the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs   One of these is the playback start position  which works in  the same way as tape  as described below     After playback stop   The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was  pressed    Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the stop  position     After recording   The unit stops at the position where recording ended    To play back a clip  press the PREV button to move to the  start frame of any clip  or press the PREV button with the  PLAY button held down to move to any position     After disc insertion   The unit stops at the
78.  the procedure  press the STOP  button with the SHIFT button held down  shortcut  operation      To unlock clips   Carry out step 2 of    Locking clips    to select a locked clip    one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail   Then   do one of the following    e Carry out steps 3 and 4 of    Locking clips       e Press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down   shortcut operation      To lock all clips    1 Carry out steps 1 and 3 of    Locking clips    to display  the THUMBNAIL MENU     2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select LOCK  ALL CLIPS  and then press the SET button     A confirmation screen appears     To cancel the lock operation and return to the   thumbnail screen   Do one of the following    e Use the sor  gt  button to select    CANCEL     and then  press the SET button    e Press the RESET button     3 Use the  lt  or  gt  button to select    OK     and then press  the SET button     4 2 Playback    All clips are locked  and you return to the thumbnail  screen     To unlock all clips  Carry out the procedure in    To lock all clips     selecting  UNLOCK ALL CLIPS in step 2     Deleting clips    e Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the  disc is set to the recording disabled position  or when  extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to    on       e Locked clips cannot be deleted    e When the target clip is referenced in a clip list  the clip  list that references the clip will also be deleted     You can use the
79.  this button  and press the  PLAY button  The recording takes place on an unrecorded  part of the disc    To stop recording  press the STOP button    This creates a clip of the recorded portion      6  Arrow buttons    The four arrow buttons are also used as the MARK1  button  MARK2 button  IN button  and OUT button  The  correspondence with the buttons is as follows    4 button  MARK1 button   Y button  MARK2 button    lt  button  IN button    gt  button  OUT button   You can use these buttons for thumbnail selection  menu  setting operations  setting IN OUT points  and so on             MARK1 button and    MARK2 button          IN button and  gt  OUT  mark  Dutton        IN indicator and OUT indicator                 MARKI button and    MARK2 button   When the THUMBNAIL button  see page 13  is lit  you  can use these for thumbnail selection    During recording and playback  the    MARK1 and     MARK2 buttons can be pressed with the SET button held  down to record a shot mark 1 or shot mark 2 as an essence  mark    To delete or change essence marks  use the supplied PDZ   1 Proxy Browsing Software         lt  IN button and  gt  OUT button   When the THUMBNAIL button  see page 13  is lit  you  can use these for thumbnail selection    An In or Out point is set when you press the SET button  with the  lt  IN or  gt  OUT button held down  The In or Out  point setting is deleted when you press the RESET button  with the   IN or  gt  OUT button held down        IN indicator and OU
80.  time data display section  the currently  selected setting value flashes to indicate that you can  change it to another value  2    The menu appears in the video panel  on an external  monitor to which the output of the VIDEO OUT 2   SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER  connector is input  and  in the time data display section     Press the RESET button        Display in video panel and on external monitor    The message    INITIALIZE ALL ITEMS TO       Setting value FACTORY PRESET VALUES     appears in the video  panel and on the external monitor   ITEM 001 The message    Init setup     appears in the time data  display     PREROLL TIME    To abandon operations and return to the setup  menu display  Press the RESET button again     5 sec    3 Press the SET button              The menu settings are reset to their factory default                Display in time data display settings   a wa le Switching between 525 U  line  525 J  line  Li  H st and 625 line modes  menu item 013     To switch between 525 U  line  525 J  line and 625 line    Setting value  flashing while changing     operation modes  proceed as follows              B Press the SET button  1 Press the MENU button   This saves the new setting value  and the menu display 2 Tur the jog dial or shuttle dial to display menu item  disappears from the video panel  the external monitor  013 in the time data display     and the time data display section     7 2 Basic Setup Menu 95           Nh    snuey  Z Ja deyo WA    3 Hold down the 
81.  time than normal is required for Wait until recording finishes        a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    Alarms relating to audio and video signals                            Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition      REF NON STD  on  limit  off A signal other than a standard reference   Input a standard reference video signal to  video signal was input to the REF the REF VIDEO IN connector   VIDEO IN connector    No INPUT  on An attempt to record was made with no   Input a video signal  and select it   input video signal    VIN NON STD on Recording is being done with a signal Input a standard video signal to the VIDEO  other than a standard video signal input   IN connector   to the VIDEO IN connector    EMPHASIS  on An unsupported audio emphasis signal   This unit does not support    EMPHASIS      EMPHASIS ON     signal  was input  ON    audio signals  Input    EMPHASIS OFF      signal        a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    Alarms relating to sensors and drives                               Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition 2    HUMID  on  limit  off Condensation was detected in the unit    See 8 2    Condensation     page 121     FAN Stopped on  limit  off The motor of the main unit fan has Contact your Sony service representative    stopped    DR FAN Stop on  limit  off The motor of a drive fan has stopped  den      The unit will operate  but continued use in   High
82.  work as a programmer  or your school  if any  to sign a    copyright disclaimer     for the library  if necessary     Here is a sample  alter the names     Yoyodyne  Inc   hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library    Frob     a library for tweaking knobs  written by  James Random Hacker       1 April 1990  Ty Coon  President of Vice    That   s all there is to it     The BSD Copyright    This product includes software to which the BSD license applies   Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code     The BSD License    Copyright    The Regents of the University of California   All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that the following  conditions are met   1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following    disclaimer     2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution     3  Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products  derived from this software without specific prior written permission     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    145    eer A    sex pueddy AM    146    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS    
83. 0  in units  of 1 second     See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make extended menu  settings     To adjust the audio recording levels    When carrying out audio recording at a reference  level   Set the VARIABLE switch  see page 15  to PRESET  The  audio signals will be recorded at a preset reference level   Use the maintenance menu item    AUDIO CONFIG    to set  the audio input level and reference level     For details of the maintenance menu operations  see 7 4 2     Maintenance Menu Operations    on page 114     Manually adjusting the audio recording  levels    Set the VARIABLE switch  see page 15  to REC and  adjust the ALL CH 1 and CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs  so that the audio level indications on the audio level meters   see page 18  do not exceed 0 dB for a maximum volume   Carry out the adjustment in E E mode     To select the E E mode  see extended menu item 108     AUTO EE SELECT        To adjust the audio recording levels for channels 1 to 8  simultaneously  set extended menu item 131    AUDIO  VOLUME    to    all    and turn the ALL CH 1 adjustment  knob     4 1 Recording    43    yoeghe d Bulpiovey p seydeyp                          yoeghe d Buipiooey p Ja deyD                          44       4 1 2 Recording Time Code and User Bit Values    There are the following four ways of recording time code     Internal Preset mode  which records the output of the  internal time code generator  set beforehand to an i
84. 00037    7 a       f  am A  TITLE00021              Clips recorded on Disc 2          Proceed as follows to specify a title and assign it to  recorded clips     1  2    Press the MENU button     Rotate the jog or shuttle dial to display menu item 035     With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog    or shuttle dial to select    on        Press the SET button   The clip title naming screen appears   ITEM 035    CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT    XxTITLE   disable  PREF IX   TITLE  NUMERIC   00001             6 1 Overview    75    suonesadgo aji4 913dey9 MMi    suoesedo aiiq 9 Ja deyo WAN    76    5 With the STOP button held down  rotate the jog or  shuttle dial to move the asterisk     on the left of the  menu items to    TITLE        The asterisk indicates the selected item     6 With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  or shuttle dial to select    enable        The automatic title generation function is enabled     T With the STOP button held down  rotate the jog or  shuttle dial to move the asterisk to the item that you  want to set first     PREFIX  A string of up to 10 characters  The  allowable characters are alphanumeric characters   symbols         amp              _       and the space character    NUMERIC  A five digit number  00001 to 99999  to  serve as the initial value of the serial number     8 Rotate the jog or shuttle dial to select the character  position to set     Q With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  or shuttle dial to select the c
85. 01 RECALL SETUP BANK 1 Set to    on    to recall menu settings from menu bank 1   B02 RECALL SETUP BANK 2 Set to    on    to recall menu settings from menu bank 2   B03 RECALL SETUP BANK 3 Set to    on    to recall menu settings from menu bank 3   B11 SAVE SETUP BANK 1 Set to    on    to save current menu settings to menu bank 1   B12 SAVE SETUP BANK 2 Set to    on    to save current menu settings to menu bank 2   B13 SAVE SETUP BANK 3 Set to    on    to save current menu settings to menu bank 3   B20 RESET SETUP MENU Set to    on    to return the settings of the current menu to the factory default    settings  Set to    bank 4    to set the current menu to the settings saved in  menu bank 4    off   on  on  default    Return the current menu to the factory default settings   bank 4  Set the current menu to the settings saved in menu bank 4           a  This is supported from firmware version 1 5     7 2 Basic Setup Menu    93    Ei NM    snuey  Z Ja deyo WA    94          7 2 2 Basic Menu Operations    Basic setup menu operations    This section explains how to select setup menu items and  how to change their values  The operations are common to  both the basic menu and the extended menu        Time data display         Video panel                                                                 eFO000    PREV PLAY NEXT STOP    Cel Ce     roe rrev    Lrewo   eno                            E SE  fa                      v                ma                      NEXT button      
86. 1 Configuration       11    Sued Jo suoyouny pue sewen Zz Ja deyo WA    12       2 2 Control Panel       ACCESS indicator     On standby switch and indicator             KEY INHI switch          2              amp  Remote control switch and NETWORK access indicator    Time data settings section  see page 13     Operating mode selection menu setting section  see page 13        Jog shuttle control block  see page 14        HOLD CLIP    THUMB  NAIL SHIFT                                        TC          COUNTER  ALL CH 1    INT PRESET FRUN SEL  O2 Oa C  RP188 REGEN   R RUN  CH 2 CH 3 CH 4   varias                                 ere         O    MEE                      A       PREV PLAY NEXT                         Hea  gt    PPI                      top F REV L FFwD M eno           4  Audio settings section  see page 15               Arrow buttons  see page 16      5  Recording and playback control section  see page 16          ACCESS indicator   This lights when the disc is accessed and when a file is  opened by a FAM or FTP connections  see page 72     If the on standby switch is set to the     position while this  indicator is lit  access to the disc is completed before the  unit switches to the standby state     While the ACCESS indicator is lit  do not turn off the AC  power switch  disconnect the power cord  or remove the  battery  This could lead to a loss of data from the disc        On    standby  V   switch and indicator   When the AC power switch on the rear panel 
87. 1 Making FAM Connections        Ifthere is a disc loaded in this unit  put the unit into the  following state     e Recording  playback  search and other disc  operations  see page 16   Stopped   e THUMBNAIL button  see page 13   Off   e Disc access by DELETE  FORMAT  and so on in  the System menu  see page 117   Stopped   e Unsaved current clip list  Save or clear   e Extended menu item 258    LIVE LOGGING     off    2 If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP   log out from the FTP session  see page 80      3 Connect the  amp S400  i LINK  connector on this unit to  the i LINK  IEEE1394  connector on the remote  computer  using an i LINK cable  see connections  illustration on page 27      Windows recognizes this unit as aremovable disc  and  displays one of the following icons on the remote  computer   s task bar   e Windows 2000  i    e    e Windows XP  T    The remote computer is now able to perform file  operations when a disc is inserted into this unit     You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into  the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable   To log in  disconnect the cable  put the unit into the  state described in step 1  and connect it again     Operation limitations during FAM connections  Control panel and LCD panel operations are disabled   except for operations with the EJECT and STATUS  buttons    This unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to  the REMOTE connector  D sub 9 pin  and   S400   i LINK  connector   
88. 16  Overview 9    P    PB indicator 18    Index    PDZ 1 25 71  connections 25  installation 71  system requirements 71  Periodic maintenance 120  PHONES jack 21  PLAY button 16  Playback 49 51  clip list 54  condition displays 37  jog mode 51  normal speed 51  preparations 49  repeat 54  shuttle mode 52  start position 49  Power  AC power 33  battery packs 33  preparations 33  Power supply section 24  Preparations 25  PRESET REGEN switch 13  PREV button 16  Proxy AV data 9  Proxy Browsing Software  See also     PDZ 1     25 71    Q    Quick scene selection 62    R    REC button 16  REC INHI indicator 18  Recording 42  essence mark 48 51  format setting 42  level adjustment 43  operation 48  preparations 42  time code user bits 44  Recording and playback control  section 16  REF VIDEO IN connectors 22  Related products 133  REMOTE 12  connector 22  Remote control switch 12  Repeat playback 54  RESET button 14  Reverse high speed search 16  RM 280 31    S    S400 connector 22  Salvage function 40    Scene selection 58  SDI 19  IN connector 23  OUT  SUPER  connectors 23  signal inputs outputs 23  Security slot 11  SET button 14  Setup 34  SETUP BANK4 113  SG 19  SHIFT button 14  Shoulder belt  posts 11  using 134  Shuttle  dial 15  mode 52  SHUTTLE button 14  SNMP 10  Specifications 131  STATUS button 19  Status display 18  STOP button 16  Sub clip 60  deleting 66  reordering 63  trimming 65  SUBCLIP button 13  Superimposed text information  See  also    Text information     35
89. 32 kHz 4ch  2ch  16 bit 48 kHz 2ch          837    AUDIO MONITOR CHANNEL  ARRANGE       Together with item 838  select the audio signals  tracks 1 to 4  to assign  to the left and right channels of the audio monitor                                Sub item   L 1  Lceh tr1 No display  Do not assign    eel as The oo  default settings are as follows   L 3   Leh tr3 Leh  tr1   L 4  Lch tr4 Reh  tr2   R 1   Rch tr1   R 2   Reh tr2   R 3   Reh tr3   R 4   Reh tr4                7 3 Extended Menu    107    Gin   AN    snuey  Z Ja deyo HA    108    Menu items in the 800s  relating to audio control       Item number  838       Item name    AUDIO MONITOR CHANNEL  ARRANGE    Settings    Together with item 837  select the audio signals  tracks 5 to 8  to assign  to the left and right channels of the audio monitor                                                     Sub item  L 5   Leh tr5 No display  Do not assign   on  Assign   L 6  Leh tr6 The factory default settings are as follows   L 7   Lch tr7 Lch  No display  L 8  Lch tr8 Rch  No display  R 5   Rch tr5  R 6   Rch tr6  R 7   Reh tr7  R 8   Reh tr8  Menu items in the 900s  relating to digital process  Item number   Item name Settings  920 SD SDI H ANC CONTROL Select whether or not to add information to the SDI output   Sub item       1   AUDIO 5CH 8CH    off  Do not add digital audio data channels 5 to 8   on  Add digital audio data channels 5 to 8           2  RP188 ATC          off  Do not add RP188 time code data   on  Add RP188 t
90. 4   Reset  RESET BANK4   Reset menu bank 4        SAVE MENU DATA    Select whether to temporarily back up  save  setup menu settings before operations such as  software upgrades    SET button  Back up  save  the settings    MENU button  Return to next highest menu level without backing up        LOAD MENU DATA    Select whether to restore  load  setting that were backed up  saved  with the    SAVE MENU  DATA    item    SET button  Restore  load  the settings    MENU button  Return to the next highest menu level without restoring        AU BANK RECALL    Select whether to recall settings automatically from a menu bank when the system is  powered on  and if so which menu bank to recall from    off  Do not recall settings from a menu bank    Bank1  from BANK1   Recall settings from menu bank 1    Bank2  from BANK2   Recall settings from menu bank 2    Bank3  from BANK3   Recall settings from menu bank 3    Bank4  from BANK4   Recall settings from menu bank 4        RESET ALL SETUP       Reset the current menu settings to the factory settings   SET button  Reset   MENU button  Return to the next highest menu level without resetting     e The line mode setting is also cleared  If you execute this item  reset the line mode  see  page 7     e Date and time settings are not cleared  but the time zone setting is cleared  After executing  this item  reset the time zone  see page 34               7 4 Maintenance Menu    113    eee Mh    snuey  Z Ja deyo WA    114    OTHERS       Item Se
91. 86 V  NTSC   0 3V  PAL   75 Q   negative sync   Composite sync   BNC type  x1   composite   1 0 Vp p  75 Q  negative sync    VIDEO IN    Analog audio inputs  AUDIO IN 1 3  2 4  XLR 3 pin  female  x2    4 0  3  6 dBu   selectable with menu   10 kQ   balanced    Time code input  TC IN BNC type  x1   SMPTE time code  0 5  Vp p to 18 Vp p  3 3 KQ  unbalanced     a  network   100Base TX 10Base T  RJ 45 type  x1   100BASE TX  complying with IEEE  802 3u  10BASE T  complying with IEEE 802 3    Output connectors    Digital signal outputs  SDI OUT  SUPER   BNC type  x1   SDI format  270 Mbps   SMPTE 259M   CCIR656 III  DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  OUT 1 2  3 4  BNC type  x2   complying with AES   3id 1995   S400  i LINK   6 pin  x1   complying with IEEE 1394    Analog video outputs  VIDEO OUT 1  2 SUPER   BNC type  x2   composite  1 0 Vp p   75 Q  sync negative    Analog audio outputs  AUDIO OUT 1 73  2 4  XLR 3 pin  male  x2    4 0  3  6 dBu   selectable with menu   600 Q loading   low impedance  balanced    Output for headphones  PHONES JM 60 Stereo phone jack  x1      o0 to  13  dBu  8 Q  unbalanced    Time code output  TC OUT BNC type  x1   SMPTE time code  2 2  Vp p  3 dB  600 Q  unbalanced    Remote control connectors    REMOTE D sub 9 pin  x1   for connection of    editing control unit  RS 422A standard      S400  i LINK   6 pin  x1   complying with IEEE 1394   supporting file access mode    Power input output connectors    DC IN 12V XLR 4 pin  male  x1   11 to 17 V DC  DC OUT 12V P
92. ALL LINE  LINE  12 to LINE 20  9  332 to LINE   525 U   LINE  22  335  LINE 23  12 to LINE 21   525 J    710   INTERNAL BB  CB75  BB  CB75   VIDEO CB100 CB100  SIGNAL  GENERATOR  713   VIDEO Item No item  SETUP  REFERENCE  723   INPUT Setting range    Setting range   VIDEO ALL LINE  LINE   ALL LINE  LINE  BLANK 12 to LINE 20  9  332 to LINE  22  335       a  Underlined values are the factory defaults        e The following video processing parameters          Parameter name   525  U  525  J  625  Setup level Item No item  Black level No item Item                   8    Before Using the Unit                      1 1 Features    The PDW R1 is a convenient  compact  and lightweight  optical disc recorder  It allows you to record to optical  discs  play back optical discs  and record audio and video  data files transferred over the    S400  i LINK D   connector  and    network  connector  It is ideal for field  applications and for desktop viewing by journalists   producers  and other production staff     1  i LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation     The features of the PDW R1 include the following     MPEG IMX DVCAM recording    The PDW R1 offers the capability to record and play back  both MPEG IMX   and DVCAM P streams  Users have  the flexibility to select from these formats according to  their picture quality needs  or to match their editing   format requirements     1  MPEG IMX and DVCAM are trademarks of Sony Corporation     Proxy AV data    Proxy AV data is a low resol
93. AS IS    AND ANY EXPRESS OR  IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT  SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL   SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS  INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT   STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     This product includes software thttpd to which the license below applies   Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code     Copyright    1995  1998  1999  2000  2001 by Jef Poskanzer  lt jef acme com gt    All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that the following  conditions are met    1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer    2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONT
94. BATTERY CONFIG and SERVICE  SUPPORT items  refer to the Maintenance Manual     AUDIO CONFIG  items relating to audio control       Item  METR HEAD ROOM    Setting    Select the audio reference level  headroom     12dB  16dB   18dB     20dB  525 U  525 J  line modes      12dB   16dB     18dB     20dB  EBUL  625 line mode           DATA LENGTH    When    IMX50        IMX40     or    IMX30    is selected in setup menu item 031  this selects the  audio quantization bit count and number of recording channels    16x8  16bit x 8ch   16 bits x 8 channels   24x4  24bit x 4ch   24 bits x 4 channels       When item 031 is set to    DVCAM     the setting is automatically fixed at 16 bits x 4 channels        NON AUDIO INPUT       Sub item       tr1 tr2       tr3 tr4       tr5 tr6       tr7 tr8    Select whether to handle digital audio signals as non audio signals during recording   Audio  audio   Handle as audio signals   data  Handle as non audio signals        INPUT LEVEL       Sub item    Set the upper limit for the signal level input to audio channels 1 3 or 2 4    4dB  OdB   3dB   6dB  525 U  525 J  line modes    4dB  OdB   3dB   6dB  EBUL  625 line mode        CH1 CH3       CH2 CH4       OUTPUT LEVEL          Set the reference level for audio output signals    4dB  OdB   3dB   6dB  525 U  525 J  line modes    4dB  OdB   3dB   6dB  EBUL  625 line mode           NETWORK CONFIG  items relating to network settings       Item  DHCP    Setting    Set whether to assign an IP address automa
95. COUNTER SEL button    TC EXT  on A time code or user bits preset operation   Try the operation again after setting the  was attempted with the INT EXT RP188   INT EXT RP188 switch to INT and the  switch is set to EXT and the PRESET   PRESET REGEN switch to PRESET   REGEN switch is set to PRESET    REGEN mode   on A time code or user bits preset operation See as ee sh a pion  was attempted with the PRESET   page 108  about how to make this setting   REGEN switch is set to REGEN    REC PAUSE  on A time code or user bits preset operation   Try the operation again after stopping  was attempted with recording paused  recording    REC mode  on  limit An attempt was made to switch video or  audio signals during recording    REC mode  on  limit  off An attempt was made to display the  system menu    DISC MENU    during  recording    REC mode  on  limit The THUMBNAIL button was pressed  during recording    REC mode  on  limit  off An attempt was made to display DRIVE  MAINTENANCE in the maintenance  menu during recording    No SEL List on  limit The SUBCLIP button was pressed Try the operation again after loading a clip  without loading a clip list from the disc list   into the current clip list    For details  see 5 3 1    Loading a Clip List  From Disc Into Unit Memory     page 68     No SUB Clip on  limit A button in the playback control section   Playback is not possible without a sub clip  was pressed when there were no sub in the current clip list   clips in the current clip lis
96. DI OUT   SUPER  connector is input displays the alarm message  and also the action to take to resolve the problem        Display in video panel and on external monitor       ALARM    REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED     SET REMOTE LOCAL NETWORK  SWITCH TO LOCAL              Display in time data display                            8 4 1 Alarm List    The following tables list the alarms displayed by this unit   categorized according to the state of the unit when the  alarms occur    The setting of basic menu item 016    ALARM DISPLAY     determines whether or not some of these alarms appear   The    Display condition    column in the tables shows  whether the alarm is displayed according to or regardless  of the setting of menu item 016     See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page 94  for more  information about how to set menu item 016     8 4 Alarms    When the unit is powered on                               Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition       MENU Ver UP on  limit  off Setup menu settings were reset  Reset the setup menu items    because this unit was upgraded   See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page  94  and 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations      page 108  for information about making  setup menu Settings   Maintenance menu item    SETUP  MAINTENANCE         SAVE MENU DATA   LOAD MENU DATA     see page 113  can be  used to temporarily back up and restore the  current menu settings    ILL  SETUP  on  limit  off Setup menu data is inval
97. ECTEMENT AVEC DES INSTRUMENTS OPTIQUES   KLASSE 1M LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEOFFNET    VORSICHT NICHT BLICKEN DIREKT MIT OPTISCHEN INSTRUMENTEN   LASERSTRALING AF KLASSE 1M VED   BNING    ADVARSEL se ikke DIREKTE MED OPTISKE INSTRUMENTER    ADVARSEL   VARNING    CAUTION    LASERSTRALING   KLASSE 1M N  R DEKSEL APNES   SE IKKE DIREKTE MED OPTISKE INSTRUMENTER     KLASS 1M LASERSTRALNING N  R DENNA DEL   R   PPNAD   BETRAKTA EJ STRALEN MED OPTISKA INSTRUMENT     VARO  AVATTUNA LUOKAN 1M LASERS  TEILY       ALA KATSO SIT   SUORAAN OPTISEN LAITTEEN L  PI     For EUROPE                   XR  This label is located on the top panel of the drive unit        Denna etikett finns pa ovansidan av driftenheten   Denne m  rkat sidder pa drevenhedens   verste panel   Tama kyltti sijaitsee ajurilaitteen ylapinnalla     Dette merket er plassert pa oversiden av driverenheten     CAUTION  The use of optical instruments with this product will increase  eye hazard     CAUTION   Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures  other than those specified herein may result in hazardous  radiation exposure     VAROITUS    LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA  KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA  ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1  YLITTAVALLE NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE     VARNING   OM APPARATEN ANV  NDS PA ANNAT S  TT AN   DENNA  BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS  KAN ANV  NDAREN  UTS  TTAS F  R OSYNLIG LASERSTR  LNING  SOM    VERSKRIDER GR  NSEN F  R LASERKLASS 1     For the cus
98. ES EBU AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT       Sub item    Select the audio signals to assign to AES EBU audio output channels        1 CH1 CH2    tr1 2  Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr3 4  Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr5 6  Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr7 8  Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2        2 CH3 CH4       tr1 2  Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4   tr3 4  Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4   tr5 6  Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4   tr7 8  Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4        828    SDI DV AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT       Sub item    Select the audio signals to assign to SDI and i LINK AV C  audio output  channels        1 CH1 CH2    tr1 2  Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr3 4  Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr5 6  Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2   tr7 8  Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2        2 CH3 CH4       tr1 2  Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4   tr3 4  Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4   tr5 6  Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4   tr7 8  Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4        831    DV OUT AUDIO MODE    Select the audio mode for      400  i LINK  connector  output    Ach  12 bit 
99. F files  some data  such as  file header metadata  may be  missing    e Depending on the transfer  destination directory and the file type   transfer may not be possible     For details  see 6 1 2    File Operation  Restrictions     page 73      Command syntax  STOR  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt     Input example  STOR Edit E0001E01 SMI             RNFR Rename a file  Specify the file to be RNFR  lt SP gt   lt path name  before change  gt   lt CRLF gt   RNTO renamed with the RNFR command  RNTO  lt SP gt   lt path name  after change  gt   lt CRLF gt   and specify the new name with the  RNTO command   Always follow a Input example   RNFR command with a RNTO RNFR General info txt  command   RNTO General clip_info txt  For details  see 6 1 2    File Operation  Restrictions     page 73    DELE Deletes the specified file on this unit  DELE  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt        Depending on the directory and file  type  deletion may not be possible     For details  see 6 1 2    File Operation  Restrictions     page 73         Input example  DELE Clip C0099 MXF       6 3 FTP File Operations          Command name  STAT    Description    Sends information about properties of  the specified file  or about data transfer  status  from this unit to the remote  computer    The following property information is  sent  depending on the file type    e MXF file    Command syntax  STAT  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt     The following data is transferred  depending 
100. Free Run INT PRESET F RUN        To record time code  after setting an initial   Internal Preset Rec Run R RUN     value     page 44    Internal Regen INT REGEN              To record time code  that follows sequentially  upon the last recorded  time code     page 46    External Regen  TC IN connector    EXT REGEN   SDI  tc    To record with the   LTC  COMPOSITE  internal time code   SG   generator synchronized   External Regen  VIDEO IN vite to external time code      connector  VITC   page 46    External Regen  i LINK connector  i LINK tc   TC    External Regen  i LINK connector  vite   VITC    External Regen  SDI IN RP188 REGEN 5 SDI       connector  SMPTE RP188 LTC    External Preset  TC IN connector    EXT PRESET    SDI       To record external time   TC  COMPOSITE  code directly     page 47    SG   External Preset  i LINK connector  i LINK     TC    External Preset  SDI IN RP188 PRESET    SDI       connector  SMPTE RP188 LTC                          To record time code after setting an initial  value   Set the following switches beforehand    e INT EXT RP188 switch  INT   e PRESET REGEN switch  PRESET   e F RUN R RUN switch  F RUN or R RUN    See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make extended menu  settings     4 1 Recording    Then set an initial value as described below  and carry out  recording  see page 48      To set an initial value  Proceed as follows              Time data display                                 
101. ILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  PURPOSE  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH  YOU  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE  YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION     12  INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY  COPYRIGHT HOLDER  OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE  PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE  BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES  INCLUDING ANY GENERAL   SPECIAL  INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO  USE THE PROGRAM  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED  INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM  TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS   EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN  ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS   How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs   If you develop a new program  and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public  the best way to achieve this  is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms     To do so  attach the following notices to the program  It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most  effectively convey the exclusion of warranty  and each file should have at least the    copyright    line and a pointer to where  the full notice is found     Copyright       This program is free software  you can redistri
102. NK connector of this unit supports the following  two functions     Input and output of DV streams  AV C mode    e DV streams can be output from this unit and recorded on  standard DV equipment    e During MPEG IMX playback  the playback signals can  be converted and output as DV streams  allowing you to  connect DV compatible nonlinear editors     1 1 Features    e The output from external DV devices  VTRs  nonlinear  editors  etc   can be input to this unit and recorded on  Professional Discs     Computer access to files  file access mode    Use of application software which supports the XDCAM  series    enables random access to video  audio  and  metadata files on Professional Discs  with the ability to  display file lists and perform file based reads and  overwrites    Files can be transferred at high speed  and thumbnail lists  of disc contents can be viewed on computer screens     1  Such software includes the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software and  the XPRI series     Equipped with network connector    This network connector of unit can be connected to  computers and networks to enable high speed file transfers  and display of lists of the video  audio  and metadata files  stored on Professional Discs  Workflows can be improved  by the ability to use FTP commands to transfer files to  remote locations     Color LCD built in    With the built in 3 5 inch type color LCD screen  you can  display contents on the disc without an external monitor     Compact size  lightw
103. OL switch  REMOTE  CONTROL   Setup menu item 19    FNC MODE     XDCAM    For information about function assignments to PF keys in  XDCAM mode  refer to the Operation Manual for the RM   280     PDW R1 settings   Remote control switch  see page 12   REMOTE   Extended menu item 214    REMOTE INTERFACE      OPIN                                                                               3 1 7 Editing Control Unit Settings    When connecting an editing control unit to use with this  unit  make the following settings  depending on the editing  control unit model     BVE 600 700 900 910 2000 9100  Set VTR constants as follows        Line  VTR CONSTANT 1       mode  1 Jo  3 la 15 6 I7   s    525 60   AO  92  oo  96  05  05  03  80       625 50  A1  92  0O  7D  05  05  03  80          Line  VTR CONSTANT 2       mode   Jo  3 la 5  6  7  8    525 60 0A  07  FE  00  80  5A  FF  5A                                  625 50  0OA  07  FE  00  80  4C  FF  4B          FXE 100 120  Set VTR constants as follows        Line  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  mode    525 60 AO0  92  00  96  05  05  03  80       625 50  A1  92  00  7D  05  05  03  80                                  Line 9 10 11 12 13 14 15  mode    525 60   OA 07 FE 00 80 5A FF       625 50   OA 07 FE 00 80 4C FF                                  RM 450  Set the DIP switches as follows        Left switch    3 1 Connections and Settings    Line 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  mode   525 60   OFF        OFF               625 50   OFF        OFF                  e
104. OTE connector  D sub 9 pin     Cut editing system comprising this unit as a player and an MSW   M2000 M2000P unit as a recorder  For cut editing  the system uses  the editing functions of the recorder     pi        b gt                 Cable with XLR connectors    Video monitor    To analog audio input connector        To composite video input connector                      To composite video       75 Q coaxial cable  not supplied           9 pin remote control cable  not supplied      not supplied        Video monitor                                                                                                                                                                                     REMOTE SDI OUT  SUPER     PDW R1  player     COMPOSITE VIDEO  OUTPUT 3  SUPER                       input connector                Reference video  signal  REF  VIDEO  VIDEO INPUT SDI INPUT  OUT 2 REF VIDEO efn aA A A     SUPER  IN Z    sir  9000  t  e 0000  GRC   ool      ge    00100 OOl            o o                         REMOTE 1 OUT  9P     MSW M2000 M2000P   recorder     PDW R1  player  settings   Remote control switch  see page 12   REMOTE   Extended menu item 214    REMOTE INTERFACE     9PIN  moni    a  Use an XLR pin converter plug  not supplied  as required        Extended menu item 820    AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 CH2 SELECT        MSW M2000 M2000P  recorder  settings  REMOTE 1 9P  button  Unlit    For details about the settings of the MSW M2000 M2000P  refer  to the operation man
105. OUNTER SEL button  Each press of the  button toggles between duration display and time code  display     To escape from the thumbnail display to the full   screen display    Press the THUMBNAIL button  turning it off     2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  desired clip     You can select clips with the following operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Move to the  previous or next clip    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  button held down  Move to the first or last clip    Press the 4 or   button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switch to the previous or next page     3 Tocue up the selected clip  press the SET button   To start playback from the selected clip  press the  PLAY button     Cuing up a frame including an essence  mark    Proceed as follows        RESET button    35 1                     m    o E u KE  Tamani HN p   mene est  lites  eFOOOO5g  Dis   r E  RE       aui                               e  J                                      3 2 4             1 Hold down the SHIFT button  and press the  THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     The essence mark selection screen appears     ESSENCE MARK SELECT    SHOT    To escape from the essence mark selection screen to  the previous screen  Press the RESET button        2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  desired essence mark     You can select essence marks with the following   operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Move to the  previous or next essence mark   
106. RIBUTORS    AS IS    AND ANY EXPRESS OR  IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT  SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL   SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS  INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT   STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     This product includes software ucd snmp to which the license below applies   Please note that we cannot respond to inquiries regarding the content of the source code     Copyright 1989  1991  1992 by Carnegie Mellon University    Derivative Work   1996  1998 2000  Copyright 1996  1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California    All Rights Reserved    Permission to use  copy  modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is  hereby granted  provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this  permission notice appear in supporting documentation  and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of  California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distributio
107. S PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER    AS IS    AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT  HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR  CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER  CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT   INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE   EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    ere A    sexipueddy AM       MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License    This product is licensed under the MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License  For the personal and non commercial use of  a consumer for  i  encoding video in compliance with the MPEG 4 Visual Standard     MPEG 4 Video     and or  ii   decoding MPEG 4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was  obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG 4 Video    No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use     Additional information including that relating to promotional  internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained    from MPEG LA  LLC   See http   www mp
108. SHUTTLE button  and turn the jog dial  or shuttle dial to set menu item 013 to    on        4 Press the SET button     5 Hold down the SHUTTLE button  and turn the jog dial  or shuttle dial to select the line mode 525 U   525 J  or  625     6 Press the SET button     T Turn the unit off  press the on standby switch to put  the unit in the standby state      Next time the unit is turned on  when the unit is put in the  operating state by pressing the on standby switch   it  operates in the new mode     Menu bank operations  menu items B01 to  B13     This unit allows menu settings to be saved in what are  termed    menu banks     Saved sets of menu settings can be  recalled for use as required     To jump to menu item B01   You can recall any required menu by turning the jog dial  or shuttle dial after pressing the MENU button    If you press the MENU button first  then the COUNTER  SEL button  you can jump directly to menu item BO1 or  HO1  The recalled menu item toggles between BO1 and  HO1 every time you press the COUNTER SEL button     Saving the current active menu settings   Set one of basic menu items B11    SAVE SETUP BANK   1    to B13    SAVE SETUP BANK 3    to    on     depending  on which of the menu banks you wish to save in  then press  the SET button     Recalling settings from a menu bank   Set one of basic menu items BO1    RECALL SETUP  BANK 1    to B03    RECALL SETUP BANK 3    to    on      depending on which of the menu banks you wish to recall  from  then
109. SONY   PROFESSIONAL DISC RECORDER    PDW R1    Professional Disc    OPERATION MANUAL  1st Edition  Revised 1     2    Important Safety Instructions    Read these instructions    Keep these instructions    Heed all warnings    Follow all instructions    Do not use this apparatus near water    Clean only with dry cloth    Do not block any ventilation openings    Install in accordance with the manufacturer   s instructions   e Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators  heat  registers  stoves  or other apparatus  including amplifiers    that produce heat    e Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  grounding type plug  A polarized plug has two blades with  one wider than the other  A grounding type plug has two  blades and a third grounding prong  The wide blade or the  third prong are provided for your safety  If the provided plug  dose not fit into your outlet  consult an electrician for  replacement of the obsolete outlet    e Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched  particularly at plugs  convenience receptacles  and the point  where they exit from the apparatus    e Only use attachments accessories specified by the  manufacturer    e Use only with the cart  stand  tripod  bracket  or table   specified by the manufacturer  or sold with the apparatus    When a cart is used  use caution when moving the cart    apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over     e Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when  unused for lon
110. T LIMITED TO   COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON  ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS  RECORDING MEDIA  EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS  OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO  RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE    Always verify that the unit is operating properly before  use  SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF  ANY KIND INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON  ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR  PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS  UNIT  EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR  AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY  OR FOR  ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER              Specifications    133    cis HAN    sex pueddy AN    134       Using the Shoulder Belt    The following figures show how to fit the shoulder belt   not supplied      If you fit the shoulder belt incorrectly  the unit may fall  down and cause body injury  Follow the procedures  described below to fit or remove the shoulder belt     To fit the shoulder belt       Press and pull up                 To remove the shoulder belt          While pressing down the indication PRESS  move the  clip downwards to release it                    Using the Shoulder Belt       Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    Thank you for your purchasing this Sony product  Please read the following notice before using the product  By installing   copying or otherwise using the product  you will be deemed to have understood and agreed to the content of the notice     Notice Concerning Software Governed by the GNU
111. T REGEN switch     F RUN R RUNswitch    bal COUNTER  F RUN SEL HOLD    GI    c   _  PRESET    INT  Op 6  6  RP188 REGEN R RUN     COUNTER SEL button           HOLD button                                     INT EXT RP188  internal external RP188  selector  switch   Before recording time code  select the type of time code   with this switch    INT  Use time code generated internally by this unit    EXT  Use time code input from an external source    RP188  Use SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI signal        PRESET REGEN  regeneration  switch   This switch selects whether to preset a new time code   value or follow already recorded time code    PRESET  Record time code starting with a preset initial  value    REGEN  Record time code continuous with existing time  code on the disc  Regardless of the setting of the F   RUN R RUN switch  the unit operates in R RUN  mode        F RUN R RUN  free run recording run  switch   This switch selects the operating mode of the internal time   code generator    F RUN  Time code advances regardless of the operating  state of the unit  Use this setting to align the time code  with real time or to synchronize the time code with  external time code    R RUN  Time code advances only during recording  Use    this setting to obtain consecutive time code on the disc     For details  see 4 1 2    Recording Time Code and User Bit  Values     page 44         COUNTER SEL button   This cycles the data displayed in the time data display   through the sequence TC 
112. T indicator   IN indicator  When an IN point is set  this lights   If an attempt is made to set the IN point after a  recorded OUT point  this flashes    OUT indicator  When an OUT point is set  this lights   If an attempt is made to set the OUT point before a  recorded IN point  this flashes        2 3 LCD Panel            Indicators on the back of the LCD panel  Status display  see page 18       Video panel  color                             VITC VIUB COUNTER HOLD  PB NDF EXTLK             m Auo     ViDEO  INPUT CH_IN    w Y         CONTROL  PUT SEL INPUT SEL f STATUS CHARACTER LIGHT MONITOR           gt                                   C o                                  Oo O                          WARNING KEY INHI REC INHI             WARNING indicator          o  F ON   OFF ON OFF L             3  Display settings section  see page 19   REC INHI indicator  KEY INHI indicator    2  Audio and video settings section  see page 19             Indicators on the back of the LCD panel  There are two indicators  as follows        OPERATION ACCESS       J          ACCESS indicator  OPERATION indicator             OPERATION indicator  Lights when the on standby  switch on the control panel is in the on  I  position    ACCESS indicator  Lights when the disc is being  accessed  If the on standby switch is set to the     position while this indicator is lit  access to the disc is  completed before the unit switches to the standby  state     While the ACCESS indicator is lit  do no
113. TC IN  connector   When extended menu item 611    TC OUTPUT  PHASE IN EE MODE     is set to    muting     no time  code is output      6  Power supply section       DC IN  12V    Ga DC IN 12V connector    VAG IN    oO  ce           AC IN connector                DCIN  DC power input  12V connector  XLR  type  4 pin  male   Connect DC power to this connector         AC IN  AC power input  connector    Connect to an AC power supply  using an optional power  cord  see page 133      2 4 Connectors          Preparations   chapter                3 1 Connections and Settings    Production of some of the peripherals and related devices  described in this chapter has been discontinued  For advice  about choosing devices  please contact your Sony dealer or  a Sony sales representative        3 1 1 Connecting an External  Monitor    Connecting a Sony LCD monitor to the VIDEO OUT 1   VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER   or SDI OUT  SUPER   connector of this unit enables you to see the output video  on the monitor screen    To superimpose text information  for example  time code  and alarm messages  use the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  or  SDI OUT  SUPER  connector  You can select the kind of  text information to display using basic menu item 005     DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT        For detailed information about basic menu items and how  to make menu settings  see 7 2    Basic Setup Menu    on  page 90     Connect a video monitor as example   or   shown in the  following figure               75 Q coaxial cable 
114. al  drop frame or non   drop frame     To check the synchronization to the external  signal   Press the STOP button to stop this unit  then press the REC  button     Check that the time code value shown in the time data  display coincides with the external time code value     To record external time code directly    You can record both of the following types of external time   code directly    e TC input to the TC IN connector of this unit   e i LINK TC input to the    S400  i LINK  connector of  this unit   e SMPTE RP 188 LTC in an SDI signal input to the SDI  IN connector of this unit    When you use this method  the internal time code  generator advances without being affected by the external  time code    To record the playback time code of external VTRs  the  methods described above in    To record with the internal  time code generator synchronized to external time code     are recommended     Use the following procedure to record external time code  directly  according to the type of external time code        Time data display    Video panel                                                                                                                                                 T Make either of the following connections and settings     To directly record TC input to the TC IN connector  Connect the time code output from the external device  to the TC IN connector  Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL  button and  while viewing the time data display or the  video panel  sele
115. als to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector    Set this item by selecting the required size while viewing the monitor    012 CONDITION DISPLAY ON Select whether to display disc condition marks on the monitor      VIDEO MONITOR dis  disable   Do not display    ena  enable   Display    a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector    013 525 625 SYSTEM SELECT Specify whether to enable switching between 525 V  line  525 J  line and   625 line modes    off  Do not enable system switching    on  Enable system switching    For the switching between 525 U  525 J  625 line modes  see page 95    When you switch line modes  all basic menu and extended menu items are   set to the factory defaults for the selected line mode    015 LCD CHARACTER TYPE          Specify the type of characters used to display information on the monitor a   when the STATUS button is pressed    W out  White letters with black outline    white  White letters on a black background     a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector     Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor           7 2 Basic Setup Menu    91    ania NM    snus  Z Ja deyo HA    92       Item number   Item name  016 ALARM DISPLAY  
116. an  transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on  a disc to the computer  On the computer side  PDZ 1  enables you to browse the proxy AV data  add or modify  metadata  titles  comments  essence marks  etc    or create  a clip list    The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be  written back to the disc loaded in this unit     Live logging function    If you set extended menu item 258    LIVE LOGGING     to     on     you can use PDZ 1 to do the following during  recording of high resolution data  view proxy AV data   perform cut editing of the data  and enter metadata     For more information about PDZ 1 functions and  operations  refer to the PDZ 1 help     System requirements    The following are required to use PDZ 1   e Computer     When using the live logging function   PC with Intel Pentium 4 CPU  at least 2 GHz  installed  memory  at least 512 MB     When not using the live logging function   PC with Intel Pentium III CPU  at least 1 GHz   installed memory  at least 512 MB    e Operating system  Microsoft Windows 2000 Service  Pack 4 or higher  or Microsoft Windows XP  Professional Service Pack 1 or higher   e Web browser  Internet Explorer 6 0 Service Pack 1 or  higher   e DirectX  DirectX 8 1b or higher    To install PDZ 1    Insert the supplied CD ROM  PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing  Software  in the CD ROM drive of the computer and  execute the Setup exe file  then follow the installation  instructions     For details  refer to the ReadMe file c
117. ansferred thus far is discarded     To log out    To log out after finishing file operations  enter    QUIT    at  the command prompt and press the Enter key     6 3 FTP File Operations 81    suonesado aji4 9 Ja deyo MMi    suojesedo aiiq 9 Ja deyo AN    82       6 3 2 Command List    The FTP protocol commands supported by this unit  include standard commands  see the next section  and  extended commands  see page 86      Standard commands  The following table shows the standard FTP commands    supported by this unit     e To execute FTP commands  you must install application  software such as PDZ 1 on your computer   e The commands supported by application software vary     In the command syntax column   lt SP gt  means a space   entered by pressing the space bar  and  lt CRLF gt  means a  new line  entered by pressing the Enter key        Command name  USER    Description    Send this command to begin the login  process     Command syntax  USER  lt SP gt   lt username gt   lt CRLF gt     Input example  USER admin                         transferred        PASS After sending the USER command  PASS  lt SP gt   lt password gt   lt CRLF gt   send this command to complete the  login process  Input example  PASS pdw r1  QUIT Terminates the FTP connection  If a file   QUIT  lt CRLF gt   is being transferred  terminates after  completion of the transfer   PORT Specifies the IP address and port to PORT  lt SP gt   lt h1 h2 h3 h4 p1 p2 gt   lt CRLF gt   which this unit should connect
118. apparaat    e Raadpleeg uw leverancier indien de batterij toch vervangen  moet worden    De batterij mag alleen vervangen worden door vakbekwaam  servicepersoneel    e Lever het apparaat aan het einde van de levensduur in voor  recycling  de batterij zal dan op correcte wijze verwerkt  worden     5  gt     Sw   For the Customers in Taiwan only  Cf  wI   Rees Has ON             Table of Contents    Before Using the Unit              cccceeeees 7  Setting the Line Mode    eee eeeeeeeee 7       Chapter 1 Overview  1 1 Features sivscicectss cc ccctccavesitvicnetiiccniecs 9       Chapter 2 Names and Functions of  Parts    2 1 Configuration              sssseeeeeeeeseeeeees 11  2 2 Control Panel          cccsssssscsssesssssesesenes 12  2 3 LCD Panel bviciinccccnnivetevavwausuotenetonsincaes 17  2 4 CONNCCTOSS      ccsssessencnsseenenssenennnnenanens 21       Chapter 3 Preparations    3 1 Connections and Settings                 25  3 1 1 Connecting an External Monitor      25  3 1 2 Connections for Using PDZ 1 Proxy   Browsing Software seee 25  3 1 3 Connecting to a Nonlinear Editing   System senan i 27  3 1 4 Connections for Recording in Parallel   With a Camcorder       seeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 27  3 1 5 Connections for Cut Editing              29  3 1 6 Using the RM 280 Editing   Controller visicseccccspetieniatetsndseedenn it 31  3 1 7 Editing Control Unit Settings            32   3 2 Power Preparations              ccceeeeees 33  3 2 1 Using AC Powet              cccesceereees 33  3
119. arting to record   and internally generates time code that follows upon the  recorded time code    In this case  the setting of extended menu item 628    DF  MODE    is ignored  New time code is recorded in the drop   frame mode of the last recorded time code on the disc     To record with the internal time code  generator synchronized to external time  code    You can record with the internal time code generator  synchronized to time code input from an external device   Use this method to synchronize the time code generators of  a number of recorders  or to carry out recording  maintaining the synchronization between the source video  and time code    In this case  the settings of the FFRUN R RUN switch and  extended menu item 628    DF MODE    are ignored    You can synchronize the internal time code generator to  one of the following external time codes    e TC input to this unit   s TC IN connector   VITC in a video signal input to this unit   SMPTE RP 188 LTC in an SDI signal input to this unit  i LINK TC input to this unit   s S400  i LINK   connector   i LINK VITC input to this unit   s S400  i LINK   connector    Use the following procedure to synchronize the internal  time code generator according to the type of external time  code     4 1 Recording          Time data display       Video panel                                                                                        F   Clic     0             Make either of the following connections and settings     To s
120. ary in non free programs enables many more people  to use the whole GNU operating system  as well as its variant  the GNU Linux operating system     Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users    freedom  it does ensure that the user of a  program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version  of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying  distribution and modification follow  Pay close attention to  the difference between a    work based on the library    and a    work that uses the library     The former contains code derived  from the library  whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run     GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING  DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION   0  This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the  copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public  License  also called    this License      Each licensee is addressed as    you        A    library    means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application  programs  which use some of those functions and data  to form executables     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    The    Library     below  refers to any such software library or work which has 
121. ata recording    XDCAM     can record various types of metadata together  with video and audio data  such as the date and time of  shooting  the cameraman  the recording method  and  comments about the material  This metadata can be used in  applications such as the following    e The supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software can be  used to add titles  comments  and other text data to discs  and clips    e Computer readable text files can be recorded on the  Professional Disc  to allow systematic content  management    e The ability to search metadata for the required audio and  video scenes brings greater efficiency to various stages    of the video production process  editing  archiving  etc       1  XDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation     Supports a variety of interfaces    The PDW R1 supports a variety of interfaces and is  suitable for use with various nonlinear editing systems     Analog interfaces   Video  The unit can input and output a composite analog  video signal    Audio  The unit has two audio channels  When in 4   channel mode  you can input two channels of audio  either as channels 1 and 2 or as channels 3 and 4  The  two audio channels can be output also either as  channels 1 and 2 or as channels 3 and 4     Digital interfaces   SDI  Serial Digital Interface  AES EBU  This allows  the unit to input and output D1  component  format  digital video and audio signals and also AES EBU   format digital audio signals     Equipped with i LINK connector    The i LI
122. ating system on which the executable runs  unless that component itself  accompanies the executable     It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not  normally accompany the operating system  Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library  together in an executable that you distribute     You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other  library facilities not covered by this License  and distribute such a combined library  provided that the separate  distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted  and provided  that you do these two things     a  Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library  uncombined with any other  library facilities  This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above     b  Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library  and  explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work     You may not copy  modify  sublicense  link with  or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this  License  Any attempt otherwise to copy  modify  sublicense  link with  or distribute the Library is void  and will  automatically terminate your rights under this License    However  parties who have received copies 
123. ation is recorded along with audio visual data  As  one of application of metadata  the UMID  Unique  Material Identifier  is internationally standardized     109    7 3 Extended Menu           NM    snuey  Z Ja deyo Hn    110    What is a UMID     The UMID  Unique Material Identifier  is a unique  identifier for audio visual material defined by the  SMPTE330M 2003 standard     The UMID may be used either as the 32 byte Basic UMID  or as the Extended UMID  which includes an additional 32  bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes     For details  refer to SMPTE 330M        Extended UMID  64 bytes        Basic UMID  32 bytes     Source Pack  32 bytes                              lt   gt   gt   Universal label L   Inst  No    Material Number   Time Date Spatial Country  Org User  aaa Co ordinates  12 bytes 1   3 bytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes   4 bytes   4 bytes                         Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in clip units   The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional  information such as location  time date  company and so  on     The UMID is applied as follows           Material No     Instance No     ene recording             ID generated when    Same as the above    Source Pack   Shooting information  when   where and who    Same as the above                Original material  00 00 00  Copied material  generation number   1 byte    random number  2 bytes     Distinguishing between the  original material and copied  material    ma
124. attery pack power immediately if AC power supply is  interrupted    c  Does not switch to battery pack power  even if DC power supply is  interrupted  To drive this unit from the battery pack  disconnect the DC  power connector from the DC IN 12V connector     3 2 Power Preparations    suolyeredalg    Ja deyo Hh      suoeredaiq    Ja deyo                       34       3 3 Setup    The principal setup operations before operating this unit  can be carried out using setup menus    The setup menus of this unit comprise a basic setup menu  and an extended setup menu  The contents of these menus  are as follows     Basic setup menu    e Items relating to the hours meter  e Items relating to operation   e Items relating to menu banks    Extended setup menu    e Items relating to control panels   Items relating to the remote control interface   Items relating to editing operations   Items relating to preroll   Items relating to disc protection   Items relating to the time code  metadata  and UMID  Items relating to video control   Items relating to audio control   Items relating to digital processing    For detailed information about the items  except for the  basic menu items relating to the hours meter  of these  menus and how to use them  see Chapter 7    Menus     page  89   For detailed information about menu operations  relating to the hours meter  see 8 1 1    Digital Hours  Meter     page 120      This unit allows four different sets of menu settings to be  saved in what are
125. aved current clip    list  or press the MENU button to quit without overwriting     To display thumbnails of the sub clips in the  newly loaded current clip list   Press the SUBCLIP button  and then press the  THUMBNAIL button        5 3 2 Deleting Clip Lists From a Disc    1 Display the CLIP menu   See    To display the CLIP menu     page 68      2 Use the 4 or     button to move the cursor to DELETE   and then press the  gt  button     A list of clip lists appears    The date of creation or the title is displayed for each  clip list  The date of creation is always displayed for  clip lists without titles     To switch between display of dates of creation   titles  and clip list names   With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button    With each press  the display changes as follows   Dates of creation  gt  titles  gt  clip list names  gt  dates of  creation       3 Use the 4 or  amp  button or the jog dial to select the  desired clip list  and then press the  gt  button     A confirmation message like the one shown below  appears        DELETE CLIP LIST    DELETE E0001 OK      DELETE    TO MENU      SET KEY  MENU_KEY             4 Press the SET button     The selected clip list is deleted from the disc        5 3 3 Clearing the Current Clip List  From the Unit Memory    This operation clears the current clip list  so that no clip list  is loaded in the unit memory     1 Display the CLIP menu   See    To display the CLIP menu     page 68      2 Use the 4 or Y button 
126. ay          SAVE    f LOAD             C0001  Clip 1   C0002  Clip 2   C0003  Clip 3           E0001  Clip list 1   E0002  Clip list 2   E0003  Clip list 3     E0099  Clip list 99                    Clip list playback    Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc   Clips are played back according to clip list data        5 2 Creating Clip Lists    Before starting    Insert a disc containing recorded clips into the unit        5 2 1 Selecting Clips    There are two ways to select clips    e Select from the thumbnail screen   You can select the desired clips from the thumbnail  screen    e Select while playing back or searching   You can select the scene to use while viewing the video     The clips selected here are added to the current clip list as  sub clips        SET button   SUBCLIP button  THUMBNAIL button   SHIFT button   RESET button    e WE sja fo  sop fe   i  0   Jog dial     gt  OUT button  Arrow buttons   lt  IN button  NEXT button  PREV button                                                                                                                          To select from the thumbnail screen     d With the SUBCLIP button off  press the  THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     Thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear     5 2 Creating Clip Lists    61    uooaj  s   u  os gJa deyo I      uonoaj  s   u  os G Je deYyD AM    62    ee    23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00    2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the  desired clip     You can also select c
127. b items  you can  select a sub item by holding down the STOP button  and rotating the jog dial or shuttle dial     The displays in the video panel  on an external  monitor  and in the time data display section change as  shown below when you hold down the STOP button   In the time data display section  the currently selected  sub item number flashes to indicate that you can  switch to another sub item        To abandon making a change                   Display in video panel and on external monitor Press the MENU button before pressing the SET  Cursor indicating the currently selected sub item button   r ET The menu display disappears from the video panel  the  BLONK LINE SELECT external monitor  and the time data display section  without the new setting value being saved     ALL LINE   oS        LINE 12 2 blnk Resetting the menu settings to their  i factory default values  l  l To reset the current active menu settings to their factory  i default values  proceed as follows   Display in time data display 1 3 2                                                             Sub item number  flashing while changing                                                                                4 With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  dial or shuttle dial to change the setting  1 Press the MENU button       The displays in the video panel  on an external   monitor  and in the time data display section change as   shown below when you hold down the SHUTTLE   button  In the
128. been distributed under these terms  A    work  based on the Library    means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law  that is to say  a work  containing the Library or a portion of it  either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into  another language   Hereinafter  translation is included without limitation in the term    modification               Source code    for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it  For a library  complete  source code means all the source code for all modules it contains  plus any associated interface definition files  plus the  scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library     Activities other than copying  distribution and modification are not covered by this License  they are outside its scope  The  act of running a program using the Library is not restricted  and output from such a program is covered only if its contents  constitute a work based on the Library  independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it   Whether that is true  depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does     1     You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library   s complete source code as you receive it  in any medium   provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and  disclaimer of warranty  keep intact all the notices that refer to this License an
129. brary  whether statically or using a shared library  the combination of the two is legally  speaking a combined work  a derivative of the original library  The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such  linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom  The Lesser General Public License permits more lax  criteria for linking other code with the library     We call this license the    Lesser    General Public License because it does Less to protect the user   s freedom than the  ordinary General Public License  It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non   free programs  These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries   However  the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances     For example  on rare occasions  there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library  so   that it becomes a de facto standard  To achieve this  non free programs must be allowed to use the library  A more frequent  case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries  In this case  there is little to gain by limiting  the free library to free software only  so we use the Lesser General Public License     In other cases  permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large  body of free software  For example  permission to use the GNU C Libr
130. bute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License  as published by the Free Software Foundation  either version 2 of the License  or  at your option  any later version     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY  without even the implied  warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  See the GNU General Public  License for more details     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program  if not  write to the Free  Software Foundation  Inc   59 Temple Place  Suite 330  Boston  MA 02111 1307 USA    Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail     If the program is interactive  make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode    Gnomovision version 69  Copyright    year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY   for details type    show w       This is free software  and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions  type    show c    for details    The hypothetical commands    show w    and    show c    should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License  Of  course  the commands you use may be called something other than    show w    and    show c     they could even be mouse   clicks or menu items whatever suits your program     You should also get your employer  if you work as a programme
131. censes are designed to make  sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software  and charge for this service if you wish   that you  receive source code or can get it if you want it  that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs   and that you know you can do these things     To protect your rights  we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender  the rights   These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software  or if you modify it     For example  if you distribute copies of such a program  whether gratis or for a fee  you must give the recipients all the  rights that you have  You must make sure that they  too  receive or can get the source code  And you must show them these  terms so they know their rights     We protect your rights with two steps   1  copyright the software  and  2  offer you this license which gives you legal  permission to copy  distribute and or modify the software     Also  for each author   s protection and ours  we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty  for this free software  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on  we want its recipients to know that what  they have is not the original  so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors    reputations   Finally  any free program is threatened constantly by software
132. cifies the transfer mode  MODE  lt SP gt   lt mode code gt   lt CRLF gt    lt mode code gt  can be any of the following  However  for  XDCAM  the mode is always    S     regardless of the mode   code specification   e S  Stream mode  default   e B  Block mode  e C  Compressed mode  Input example  MODE S  LIST Sends a list of files from this unit to the   LIST  lt SP gt   lt options gt   lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt   remote computer    lt options gt  can be any of the following   e  a  Also display file names that begin with         e  F  Append         to directory names   The following data is transferred  depending on whether   lt path name gt  specifies a directory or file   e Directory specified  A list of the files in the specified  directory  e File specified  Information about the specified file  e No specification  A list of the files in the current directory  The wildcard characters          any string  and          any  character  may be used in  lt path name gt    Input example 1  LIST  a Clip  Input example 2  LIST Clip   MXF  NLST Sends a list of file names from this unit   NLST  lt SP gt   lt options or path name gt   lt CRLF gt   to the remote computer  with no other  information  The following options may be specified when no path name  is specified   e  a  Also display file names that begin with         e  l  Display information other than file name  gives the same  result as the LIST command    e  F  Append         to directory names   The follow
133. clips you  want  save the current clip list to disc     See 5 2 6    Saving the Current Clip List to Disc     page  66      To select while playing back and searching   quick scene selection     T With the SUBCLIP button off  and the clip displayed  in full screen mode  play back the clip or conduct a  search to find the point that you want to set as the In  point     To display the desired clip in full screen mode   If the thumbnail screen is displayed  use the arrow  buttons or jog dial to select the clip to display in full   screen mode  and then press the SET button             ere    TCR 00 30  33 05  SHUTTLE STILL       To search  Use the jog and shuttle dials     At the point you want to set as the In point  hold down  the  lt   IN button and press the SET button     An In point is set  and the IN indicator lights     In the same way  search for the point you want to set  as the Out point  and then hold down the  gt  OUT  button and press the SET button     An Out point is set  and the OUT indicator lights        Clips recorded on the disc       In point vy Out point       Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3             To check the duration   Press the  lt  IN button and the  gt  OUT button at the  same time    The duration appears on the screen     To reset an In point or Out point  With the  lt  IN button or  gt  OUT button held down   press the RESET button     With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button     The section between the In point and Out point is
134. ct one of SDI  COMPOSITE  or SG     To directly record i LINK TC   Connect an i LINK signal to the    S400  i LINK   connector  Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL button and   while viewing the time data display or the video panel   select i LINK     4 1 Recording    47    yoeghe d Bulpiovey p seydeyp                          yoeghe d Buipiooey p Ja deyo                          48    To directly record SMPTE RP 188 LTC in an SDI  signal   Connect an SDI signal containing SMPTE RP188  LTC to the SDI IN connector  Press the VIDEO  INPUT SEL button and  while viewing the time data  display or the video panel  select SDI     2 Set the PRESET REGEN switch to PRESET  and set  the INT EXT RP188 to one of the following     To record TC input to the TC IN connector  or  i LINK TC  EXT  To record SMPTE RP188 LTC  RP188    For details of menu setting operations  see Chapter 7     Menus     page 89         4 1 3 Recording Operation    To record  proceed as follows                                                                    1 Insert a disc     For details  see 3 6 4    Loading and Unloading a  Disc    on page 38     2 Hold down the REC button  and press the PLAY  button     Recording starts     3 To stop recording  press the STOP button     If the disc becomes full    Recording stops and the message    ALARM DISC END      appears on the video panel     The shortest clip that can be recorded is 2 seconds long   Even if recording start and stop operations are performed  within 2 seconds  a 2
135. d   Partial  overwrite  C S01 MXF    Proxy AV data  MXF  file generated   Yes No No P  No     No 2   automatically when a C  MXF file is  created      0001 to 4999  Other files Files other than the above    No    No                                 a  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  the unit can handle files with user   defined names in the    C     part    b  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  when the    C     part of a C  MXF  file name is changed  a C SO1  MXF file with the same name in the    C      part is generated automatically    c  When a C  MXF file is created  a C S01 XML file with the same name in  the    C     part is created automatically    d  When a C  MXF file is deleted  the C SO1 XML file with the same name  in the    C     part is also deleted automatically     Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory     74 6 1 Overview    General directory                               File name Content Operations  Read  Overwrite    Rename Create Delete  Partial read   Partial  overwrite  Any file Yes Yes Yes 2  Yes Yes  gt            a  UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length   Depending on the  character type  file names  including extension  may be limited to 21  characters     b  Only when the write inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording  and  when extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to    off        The following directory operations are possible in the   General directory    e Directory creation  up to 64 levels 
136. d to the absence of any warranty  and  distribute a copy of this License along with the Library     You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy  and you may at your option offer warranty protection  in exchange for a fee     You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it  thus forming a work based on the Library   and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above  provided that you also meet  all of these conditions     a  The modified work must itself be a software library     b  You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any  change     c  You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License     d  If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program  that uses the facility  other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked  then you must make a good  faith effort to ensure that  in the event an application does not supply such function or table  the facility still operates   and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful      For example  a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent  of the application  Therefore  Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this  function must be
137. d to this unit  see page 94   Press once  more to return to the original display  The system menu   see page 117  appears in the time data display  in the  video panel  and on an external monitor  when you press  this button with the SHIFT button held down  Press this  button again to escape from the system menu        SET button   Use for setup menu settings  see page 94   scene selection    thumbnail search  settings  and so on    The scene selection window or a menu for sub clip   operations appears when you press this button with the   SHIFT button held down with either of the following   displayed  The window or menu appears in the video   panel  and on an external monitor    When a thumbnail screen is displayed  The scene  selection window  see page 62  appears    When a sub clip thumbnail is displayed  A sub clip  operation menu  see page 64  appears        RESET button   Press to reset the counter  This is also used to cancel or  abandon setup menu settings and scene selection   thumbnail search      2 2 Control Panel    Jog shuttle control block         SHUTTLE button     Jog shuttle transport  indicators     JOG button    _       SHUTTLE                Shuttle dial  Jog dial             For details of playback operations with these buttons and  dials  see 4 2 2    Playback Operation    on page 51        SHUTTLE button   To play back in shuttle mode using the shuttle dial  press  this button  turning it on    This button switches to shuttle mode whenever it is  press
138. de REC Record mode  servo unlocked      VITC field mark REC LOCK _   Record mode  servo locked           blank   Fields 1 and 3  for 525 60 mode  or fields 1 3    YOG STILL   pA still picture in jog mode  5 and 7  for 625 50 mode  JOG FWD Jog mode in forward direction         Fields 2 and 4  for 525 60 mode  or fields 2  4  6 and JOG REV Jog mode in reverse direction  S Uor oroia more  SHUTTLE  STILL  A still picture in shuttle mode     Menu setting states SHUTTLE  Speed    Shuttle mode  TOP 001 xxx Cuing up to the first frame of the  Display Description first clip   B1 The current menu settings are the same as END xxx xxx Cuing up to the last frame of the  the settings in menu bank 1  last clip   p  B2 The current menu settings are the same as PREROLL Cuing up during thumbnail search  the settings in menu bank 2   B3 The current menu settings are the same as   Playback condition mark  the settings in menu bank 3  One of three channel condition marks is displayed when  B4 The current menu settings are the same as the ACCESS indicator is lit during any mode except  the settings in menu bank 4  recording  The three channel condition marks indicate the  DF The current menu settings are the same as following three stages   the factory defaults   No display The current menu settings are different from  all of the above                    Operation mode  The field is divided into two blocks as shown below   e Block A displays the operation mode     36 3 5 Superimposed Text Informat
139. ded    menu item 214 is set to    PIN          a  FTP connections can be made only when the device connected to the REMOTE  connector  D sub 9 pin  is in stop mode  During FTP connections  the device  connected to the REMOTE connector cannot be used to control this unit        98    7 3 Extended Menu          Menu items in the 200s  relating to the remote control interface          Item number  258    Enable or disable the live logging function when using the PDZ 1 Proxy       Item name    LIVE LOGGING       Settings    Browsing Software   off  Disable   on  Enable     During live logging  regardless of the settings of the switches  INT EXT   RP188  PRESET REGEN  and F RUN R RUN  in the time data settings  section  the internal time code generator always runs in free run mode   Time code cannot be recorded in internal preset mode           Menu items in the 300s  relating to editing operations       Item number  308    Select the STD or NON STD mode in accordance with a composite    Item name    SELECTION OF STD NON STD  FOR COMPOSITE VIDEO IN    Settings    video or S video input    STD  forced STD   The STD mode is always used  forced STD mode     N STD  forced non STD   Use this setting when the input video signal is  unstable  forced NON STD mode      When using a VCR with no built in time base corrector  e g  a home use  VHS system VCR   select N STD                 310 REC INHIBIT Select whether recording is inhibited   off  Do not inhibit recording   on  Inhibit record
140. definitions files in the  Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions      b  Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library  A suitable mechanism is one that  1  uses at  run time a copy of the library already present on the user   s computer system  rather than copying library functions  into the executable  and  2  will operate properly with a modified version of the library  if the user installs one  as  long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with     c  Accompany the work with a written offer  valid for at least three years  to give the same user the materials specified  in Subsection 6a  above  for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution     d  If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place  offer equivalent access to  copy the above specified materials from the same place     e  Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy     For an executable  the required form of the    work that uses the Library    must include any data and utility programs  needed for reproducing the executable from it  However  as a special exception  the materials to be distributed need  not include anything that is normally distributed  in either source or binary form  with the major components   compiler  kernel  and so on  of the oper
141. dent of having been made by running the Program     Whether that is true depends on what the Program does     You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program   s source code as you receive it  in any medium  provided  that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of  watranty  keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty  and give any other  recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program     You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy  and you may at your option offer warranty protection  in exchange for a fee     You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it  thus forming a work based on the Program   and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above  provided that you also meet  all of these conditions     a  You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any  change     b  You must cause any work that you distribute or publish  that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the  Program or any part thereof  to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License     c  If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run  you must cause it  when started running  for such interactive use in the most ordinary way  to print or disp
142. dez pas le connecteur  pour le c  blage de p  riph  riques pouvant avoir une tension  excessive a ce port  Suivez les instructions pour ce port     Aus Sicherheitsgriinden nicht mit einem Peripheriegerat   Anschluss verbinden  der zu starke Spannung fiir diese  Buchse haben k  nnte  Folgen Sie den Anweisungen fiir  diese Buchse       8400  i LINK  connector  6 pin  IEEE1394  compliant    Connect a DV device  computer  or similar  using an   i LINK cable  To prevent the connector from coming   loose  we recommend that you secure the cable in the cable   clamp as shown in the following figure        To i LINK  IEEE 1394  Cable clamp    connector of DV device or PC       o laa                   i LINK cable    s     not supplied    ice _       AN Teall   d  gt    GC                                           When the unit is shipped from the factory  the audio output  signal is set to 16 bit 48 kHz 2ch mode  You can change  the audio mode and output channel settings with extended    2 4 Connectors    menu item 831    DV OUT AUDIO MODE    and extended  menu item 828    SDI DV AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT        See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make these settings     If video or audio signals from an external device  connected with the   S400  i LINK  connector are not  output  disconnect the i LINK cable and connect it again   pushing it straight in    When the PDW R1 is connected to a device with a 6 pin  i LINK connector by an i LINK
143. displayed during playback and stop    TC VITC  time code type  indicator  This lights when  the COUNTER SEL button  see page 13  is set to TC   The time data display shows the time code    When extended menu item 629    TC SELECT    is set   to    tc     this shows    TC     and when    vite    is selected    it shows    VITC       UB VIUB  user bit type  indicator  This lights when the  COUNTER SEL button is set to UB  The time data  display shows the user bits    When extended menu item 629    TC SELECT    is set   to    tc     this shows    UB     and when    vite    is selected   it shows    VIUB       indicator  This lights in the following cases    e In playback mode  when VITC is being read    Regardless of what the time data display is  showing     e When VITC is being recorded  or in E E mode 1  when VITC is recorded due to one of the following  conditions      Extended menu item 619    VITC    is set to    on         There is VITC in the selected video input signal   and that line has been set to    thru    with extended  menu item 723    INPUT VIDEO BLANK       PB  playback  indicator  This lights when the output of  the time code reader  TCR  is being displayed    NDF  non drop frame  indicator  This lights in E E  mode when extended menu item 628 is set to    ndf      and during playback when the clip on the disc has non   drop frame time code    EXT LK  external synchronization  indicator  This  lights when the internal time code generator is locked  to an exter
144. e        To synchronize to SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI  signal   Set the INT EXT RP188 switch to RP188 and the  PRESET REGEN switch to REGEN     To synchronize to i LINK TC   e Set the INT EXT RP188 switch to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch to REGEN    e Set extended menu item 629    TC SELECT    to    te        To synchronize to i LINK VITC   e Set the INT EXT RP188 switch to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch to REGEN    e Set extended menu item 629    TC SELECT    to     vite        For details of menu setting operations  see Chapter 7     Menus    on page 89     This starts the internal time code generator running in  synchronization with the external time code generator   Once the internal time code generator is synchronized  with the external time code generator  even if the  external time code generator connection is removed   the internal time code generator continues to run     When the input video signal selected is i LINK or SDI   setting the INT EXT RP188 switch to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch to REGEN automatically  synchronizes the internal time code generator to the time  code received through the   S400  i LINK  connector or  SDI IN connector   When the INT EXT RP188 switch is set to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch is set to REGEN  the internal  time code advance mode and frame count mode  for 525  line mode only  are automatically set as follows   Advance mode  free running  Frame count mode  for 525 line mode only   the same  as the external time code sign
145. e   e If the firmware of your XDCAM device is version 1 4x  or lower  clips with user defined names appear as     C5000    to    C9999     in order of recording     6 2 File Access Mode File Operations       6 2 File Access Mode File  Operations    File access mode operating environment    Operating system requirements for file operations by file   access mode  called FAM below  are as follows    e Computer operating system  Microsoft Windows 2000  Service Pack 4 or higher  or Microsoft Windows XP    Preparations    Do the following on the remote computer and this unit    e Install the FAM driver on the remote computer  see the  next section     e Set extended menu item 215    i LINK MODE    to     FAM        See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make this setting     To install the FAM driver   Insert the supplied CD ROM  PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing  Software  in the CD ROM drive of the computer and  execute the Setup exe file  then follow the installation  instructions     For details  refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD   ROM disc     Use Version 1 4 or higher of the FAM driver  The FAM  driver on the supplied CD ROM is Version 1 4 or higher   If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer   check the version    To check the version  click    Add or Remove Programs      Windows XP  or    Add Remove Programs     Windows  2000   select    ProDisc     and then click    Click here for  support information           6 2 
146. e  DC power or mount the battery pack on the battery pack  shoe before playback       COUNTER SEL button  page 13    Select the data  elapsed playback time  time code value or  user bit data  to be displayed in the time data display   When displaying the time code value  select TC or VITC  with extended menu item 629    TC SELECT        Adjusting video processing parameters    You can adjust the following video processing parameters     e Video output level   e Chroma output level   e Setup black level   e Chroma phase   e Output signal sync phase   e Output signal subcarrier phase    4 2 Playback    49    yoeghe d Bulpiovey p seydeyp                          yoeghe d Buipiooey p Ja deyo                             Video panel                                                                Ri oe a ip     ur e    amp O 000698 a    PREV PLAY NEXT STOP                                              maj      gt                                                   rorrrev Lr ewo mo                             With the SHIFT button held down  press the STATUS  button     The process control screen    appears in the video    panel    PROCESS CONTROL V  VIDEO VAR     CHROMA VAR         BLACK PRE         CHROMA Ph PRE     i    SYNC Ph PRE        1         SC Ph PRE 000   KEY ASIGN   MENU   ADJUST  gt  KEY JOG DIAL  PREST VAR   KEY RESET  EXIT   STATUS             1  When the line mode is 525 U  525 J   SETUP appears instead of  BLACK     e Do the following operations within 30 seconds  The 
147. e library after making  changes to the library and recompiling it  And you must show them these terms so they know their rights     We protect your rights with a two step method   1  we copyright the library  and  2  we offer you this license  which gives  you legal permission to copy  distribute and or modify the library     To protect each distributor  we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library  Also  if the library  is modified by someone else and passed on  the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version  so  that the original author   s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others     Finally  software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program  We wish to make sure that a company  cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder  Therefore  we  insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified  in this license     Most GNU software  including some libraries  is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License  This license  the  GNU Lesser General Public License  applies to certain designated libraries  and is quite different from the ordinary  General Public License  We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free  programs     When a program is linked with a li
148. e of the first clip  Hold down  the SHIFT button  and press this button        PLAY  playback  button   To start playback  press this button  turning it on    This button stops recording whenever it is pressed  even  during recording  If you do not want recording to stop with  this button  set extended menu item 145    MODE KEY  ENABLE DURING RECORDING    to    stop           NEXT button   Press this button  turning it on  to jump to the next clip  and   show the first frame    This button is also used together with other buttons for the   following operations    Forward direction high speed search  Hold down the  PLAY button  and press this button  A high speed  search in the forward direction is carried out    Displaying the last frame of the last clip  Hold down the  SHIFT button  and press this button        STOP button   To stop recording or playback  press this button  turning it  on  The frame at the stop point appears    The unit enters standby off mode when you press this  button with the SHIFT button held down  It returns from  standby off mode to the original state when you press this  button again with the SHIFT button held down   The lit or  unlit status of the STOP button does not change      This unit can automatically enter standby off mode  whenever a specified time elapses in disc stop mode  For  details  see the description of extended menu item 501     STILL TIMER     page 101      2 2 Control Panel       REC  record  button   To start recording  hold down
149. e screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display     3 Use the  lt  or  gt  button to select OK  and then press the  SET button     The selected sub clip is deleted  and the screen returns  to the sub clip thumbnail display     5 2 Creating Clip Lists          4 Save the current clip list to disc     See 5 2 6    Saving the Current Clip List to Disc     page  66         5 2 5 Previewing the Current Clip  List    Press the SUBCLIP button  turning it on  and then press  the PLAY button    When the THUMBNAIL button is lit  playback starts from  the beginning of the selected sub clip    When the THUMBNAIL button is not lit  playback starts  from the first sub clip in the clip list        5 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to  Disc    The current clip list is not saved to disc unless you carry  out this procedure  After editing clip list data  you should  always save it to disc     e The current clip list is not saved to disc if the disc   s write  protect tab is set to the recording disabled position    e Unless you carry out this procedure  the unit does not  enter the standby state even if you set the on standby  switch to the      position  Follow the message that  appears and return the on standby switch to the I side   and then save the clip list or  if you do not need it  clear  it  see page 69            SET button                    mss C noe    oo 6 2 6       ALL     cha     Cs     CE  om moron    EOOOOog       oon    s SSEL              PREV PLAY NEXT STOP REC     lt 
150. e used in the time code generated by the time          code generator    000  000 not specified   Character set not specified    001  001 iso character   8 bit characters compliant with ISO 646 and  ISO 2022    010  010 unassigned 1   Undefined    011  011 unassigned 2   Undefined    100  100 unassigned 3   Undefined    101  101 page   line   SMPTE 262M page line multiplex system    110  110 unassigned 4   Undefined    111  111 unassigned 5   Undefined              7 3 Extended Menu    101    ania NM    snuey  Z Ja deyo HAI    Menu items in the 600s  relating to the time code  metadata  and UMID                                        Item number   Item name Settings  611 TC OUTPUT PHASE IN EE MODE   Select the time code output mode for output from the TC OUT connector  in E E mode   mutng  muting   Suppress the output   thru  through   Output the time code input to the TC IN connector as it  is    v in  video input phase   Output the time code with the same phase as  the input video signal phase    v out  video output phase   Output the time code with the same phase  as the output video signal phase    612 TC OUTPUT MUTING IN SEARCH   Select whether to suppress the output from the TC OUT connector in jog    MODE shuttle mode   on  Suppress   off  Do not suppress    619 VITC Specify whether or not to record the VITC generated by the internal time  code generator   off  Do not record internally generated VITC   on  Record internally generated VITC    Even if this item is set to
151. ecorded with video data to identify  each frame of the video by hour   minute  second and frame number   SMPTE time code is applied to  NTSC system  and EBU time code to  PAL and SECAM systems     Glossary    as A    sexipueddy AM    150    UMID   Unique Material Identifier  A  standard  SMPTE 330M  for video  and audio metadata  The Basic  section of a UMID contains a  globally unique number and a  material number for the identification  of recorded material  An optional  section called the    Source Pack     contains information such as the time  and location of recording  A UMID  with the Basic section only is called a  Basic UMID  A UMID with the  Source Pack is called an Extended  UMID     User bits   A total of 32 bits are provided in the  time code which the user can use to  record such information as date  reel  number  or scene number on video  tape  Also called user s bits     Glossary       Index    A    AC IN connector 24    AC power  inlet connector 11  switch 11  ACCESS indicator 12  17  Accessories    not supplied 133  supplied 133  AES EBU 19  Alarms 122  list 122  ALL CH 1  CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment  knobs 15  ANALOG 19  Analog  audio signal inputs outputs 23  interfaces 10  video signal inputs outputs 23  Appendixes 131  Arrow buttons 16  AUDIO  IN 1 3  2 4 connectors 23  METER SEL button 15  OUT connectors 23  Audio  settings section 15  Audio and video settings section 19  AUDIO INPUT  CH button 19  SEL button 19  Audio level  meters 18  AUDIO MONITOR  SEL b
152. ector          To network connector       Laptop computer    Make sure the remote control switch  see page 12  is set to     NETWORK    on each of the three PDW R1 units and extended  menu item 257    NETWORK ENABLE     is set to    net        a  Use a straight cable                    3 1 Connections and Settings    Using the   S400  i LINK  connector  FAM  connection     The following shows an example of a FAM  file access  mode  connection     The PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software must be installed in  advance    The required FAM driver is also installed when you install  the PDZ 1 software     See 5 4    Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software     page  71  for more information about installing the PDZ 1  software     Some limitations apply to FAM connections  For details   see 6 2    File Access Mode File Operations     page 78             i LINK cable  not supplied                                                                                   S400  i LINK     To i LINK  IEEE1394   connector      Laptop computer    Make sure extended menu item 215    i LINK MODE    is set to     FAM  PC REMOTE                     3 1 3 Connecting to a Nonlinear  Editing System   You can send video audio signals  AV C data  from this   unit to a nonlinear editing system connected to the 4S400     i LINK  connector   The following figure shows an example connection     The  S400 G LINK  connector of this unit outputs  video audio signals in DVCAM format  Data recorded in  MPEG IMX format is out
153. ed  even during recording  If you do not want  recording to stop with this button  set extended menu item  145    MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING    to     stop  Pressing the JOG button or turning the jog dial switches to  jog mode               Jog shuttle transport indicators   These show the playback direction in jog or shuttle speed  mode     lt   green   Lights during playback in the reverse direction    gt   green   Lights during playback in the forward direction   H  red   Lights during still image display        JOG button   To play back in jog mode using the jog dial  press this  button  turning it on    This button switches to jog mode whenever it is pressed   even during recording  If you do not want recording to stop  wih this button  set extended menu item 145    MODE KEY  ENABLE DURING RECORDING    to    stop       Pressing the SHUTTLE button or turning the shuttle dial  switches to shuttle mode        Jog dial   Turn this for playback in jog mode  Turn clockwise for  forward direction playback  and counterclockwise for  reverse direction playback  In jog mode  the playback    speed varies in the range  1 times normal speed  according  to the rotation rate of the jog dial  There are no detents   Normally  you press the JOG button before turning the jog  dial  but it is also possible to make a setting to enable jog  mode directly by turning the dial  set extended menu item  101    SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE    to     dial               Shuttle dial   Turn 
154. egla com    1 48 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License       Glossary    AES EBU   A standard established jointly by the  AES  Audio Engineering Society   and EBU  European Broadcasting  Union  for serial transmission of  digital audio  Two channels of audio  can be transmitted via a single  connector     Clip  A recording unit  Clips are created  every time recording starts and stops     Clip list   A list of locations in the material  recorded on the disc  arranged in any  order  Clips lists can be created with  the scene selection function of this  unit  and with the supplied PDZ 1  Proxy Browsing Software     Color subcarrier   In a composite video signal  a signal  superimposed upon the picture   luminance  information for the  purpose of conveying the associated  color information  Color and  saturation information is conveyed  by the phase and amplitude of the  color subcarrier  Also called  subcarrier     Composite video signal   A video signal in which luminance  and chrominance are combined along  with timing reference    sync     information to make composite  video     Drop frame mode   SMPTE time code runs at 30 frames   second  while the NTSC color  television system runs at about 29 97  frames second  Drop frame mode  adjusts the running of time code to  eliminate the discrepancy between  time code value and actual time by  dropping two frames from the time  code value at the beginning of each  minute except every tenth minute     E E mode   Electric to Electr
155. eight and battery   powered operation    The PDW R1 is designed small and light enough to carry  out to the field and it is operable with battery to work  speedily in the field     Supporting SNMP for service and  maintenance    The PDW R1 is compatible with Sony remote  maintenance and monitoring software   an SNMP   compliant application that can monitor and log the  hardware   s status in real time via a TCP IP network  If a  malfunction is detected  this system can immediately  identify the problem  allowing you to take corrective  action        Names and Functions of  Parts Chapter                2 1 Configuration    Operation of the PDW R1 uses the parts shown in the  following figure        Security slot  You can fita commercially available  security cable into this slot         AC power switch  rear panel   Press I to power on  press O to    power off                    I  i                                     Battery pack shoe  covered  MW    see page 33     DP 44  a  For information about how to use your  amp  5      4   y I  Cay  security cable  refer to the instructions Wied    provided with the security cable     lent    Shoulder belt posts   see page 134     Carrying handle    Use this to carry the unit                x     Press here to raise the cover     LCD panel  see page 17     Disc slot and EJECT button   see page 38     Control panel  see page 12  Cable clamp  see page 22        Connectors  see page 21     Built in speaker  monaural      J             2 
156. els   Proxy audio  A law  8 4 channels  8 bits  8 kHz     1  The MPEG 4 Codec is a product of Ingenient Technologies  Inc     Recording Playback time  MPEG IMX  50 Mbps  45 min   40 Mbps  55 min   30 Mbps  68 min   DVCAM 85 min   Search speed  Jog mode    Specifications 1 31    sex pueddy AN     1 times normal speed  Shuttle mode   20 times normal speed    Video performance  Sampling frequency  Y  13 5 MHz  R Y B Y  6 75 MHz  Quantization 10 bits sample  Analog composite input to analog composite output  Bandwidth  30 Hz to 4 5 MHz  0 5  1 5  dB  NTSC   25 Hz to 5 5 MHz  0 5      1 5 dB  PAL   S N ratio  53 dB or more  Differential gain  2  or less  Differential phase  2   or less  Y C delay  20 ns or less  K factor  2T pulse   2  or less    Processor adjustment range    Video level    o to  3 dB  Chroma level   to  3 dB  Set up black level    30 IRE  210 mV  Chroma phase hue    30    System sync phase    3 us  System SC phase    200 ns    Audio performance    Frequency response  20 Hz to 20 kHz  0 5  1 0 dB  0 dB at 1  kHz   Dynamic range More than 90 dB  Distortion Less than 0 05   at 1kHz   Head room 20 18 16 12 dB  Selectable with menu     Input connectors    Digital signal inputs  SDI IN BNC type  x1   SDI format  270 Mbps   SMPTE 259M   CCIR656 III  DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  IN 1 2  3 4  BNC type  x2   complying with AES   3id 1995  S400  i LINK   6 pin  x1   complying with IEEE 1394    Analog video inputs  REF VIDEO IN  BNC type  x1     Specifications    Black burst  0 2
157. em 031    IMX30 Clip different from the setting of basic menu   DVCAM Clip item 031    RECORDING FORMAT     See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page   4CHx24 Clip 94  about how to change this setting    8CHx16 Clip   REC INHI   on  limit An attempt to save the current clip list To perform these operations  cancel all of  was made while the REC INHI indicator   the following write protect settings   was lit  e Write Inhibit tab of the disc   REC INHI   on  limit  off An attempt to delete a clip was made     Setting of extended menu item 310    REC  while the REC INHI indicator was lit  INHIBIT         e Mismatch between the recorded   REC INHI   on  limit  off e area sre was e sections of the disc and the setting of   VALETS ne eee basic menu item 031    RECORDING  FORMAT      No Clip  on  limit A playback or search button was These operations are not possible   pressed for a disc containing no  recorded clips    No Clip  on  limit  off An attempt was made to delete a clip  from a disc containing no recorded clips    Disc Top  on The PREV button was pressed while  stopped at the top of the disc  or an  attempt was made to perform a high   speed reverse search    Disc End  on The NEXT button was pressed while  stopped at the end of the disc  or an  attempt was made to perform a high   speed forward search    MAX   Files on  limit  off The number of files on the disc had Insert a different disc with enough free  reached the upper limit  5000   or there   capacity   was not en
158. en a file in the General directory is specified in  lt path   name gt   444  Forbid writing to and execution of the file   555  Forbid writing to the file  but allow execution   666  Allow writing to the file  but forbid execution   777  Allow writing to and execution of the file     Input example  SITE CHMOD 444 Clip C0001 MXF  Lock  clip CO0001 MXF           a  This is supported from firmware version 1 5     6 3 FTP File Operations    87    suonesado aji4 9 Ja deyo Nil    suoesedo aiiq 9 Ja deyo WAN    88       6 4 Recording  Continuous Time  Code With FAM and  FTP Connections    When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP  you  can create new clips with time code that is continuous with  the time code of the last frame of the last clip on the disc   To record continuous time code  first set the INT EXT   RP188 switch to INT  set the PRESET REGEN switch to  REGEN  and set extended menu item 629    TC SELECT     to    tc     Then proceed as follows     Continuous time code cannot be recorded if extended  menu item 629    TC SELECT    is set to    vitc        See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make extended menu  settings     FAM connection  Write clip files to the unit from the computer or other  device that is connected to this unit     FTP connection   Use the    STOR    command to transfer clip files from the  computer that is connected to this unit    If you issue the    SITE UMMD    command immediately  before the
159. es P  No No No  disc properties     MEDIAPRO XML_   Contains a list of audio video Yes No No No No       material on the disc  basic    properties  related information  and o  information about access methods  B  Other files Files other than the above   No   No   y  a  Only when sub item    NAMING FORM    of basic menu item 036 is set to    fe   ne       g     a    e Directories cannot be created in the root directory      The directories in the root directory  Clip  Edit  Sub  and  General  cannot be deleted or renamed                 Clip directory  File name Content Operations  Read  Overwrite    Rename Create Delete  Partial read   Partial  overwrite  C  MXF     Clip file created by recording  MXF   Yes No No  gt   Yes     Yes 9   file      0001 to 4999  C M01 XML    Metadata file generated Yes Yes     No No 9  No    automatically when C  MXF file is  created      0001 to 4999  Other files Files other than the above     No     No                                   a  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  the unit can handle files with user   defined names in the    C     part    b  Possible with firmware version 1 5 and higher    c  Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length  in a format matching  the line mode format  525 625  and recording format  IMX50 IMX40   IMX30 DVCAM  and number of audio channels of the recorded sections  of the disc  and which can be overwritten by XDCAM    d  Only when the write inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording  and  whe
160. extended menu item 310    REC  INHIBIT    is set to    on        1 With the SUBCLIP button off  press the  THUMBNAIL button  turning it on     The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear     2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the clip  to lock     You can select clips with the following operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Move to the  previous or next clip    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  button held down  Move to the first or last clip    Press the 4   button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switch to the previous or next page     3 With the SHIFT button held down  press the    SUBCLIP button  Or press the MENU button   The THUMBNAIL MENU appears     C0006 6 143    an a   O    THUMBNAIL MENU    SHIFT RESET      DELETE CLIP  LOCK ALL CLIPS    Ee  30    DUR 00 03 10 00    To escape from the THUMBNAIL MENU to the  previous screen  Press the RESET button     4 With LOCK UNLOCK CLIP selected  press the SET    button     4 2 Playback       55    yoeghe d Bulpiooey p seydeyp                          yoeghe d Buipiooey p Ja deyo                          56    You return to the thumbnail screen  and a lock icon  appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show  that it is locked        Lock icon    DUR 00 03 10 00    23 AUG 14 30                Locked clips cannot be deleted or renamed  Unlock the  clip if you want to perform any of these operations     To lock clips without displaying the THUMBNAIL  MENU   After carrying out step 2 in
161. f         The    Y add    function is a circuit operation to interpolate the video signal  vertically during jog or variable speed playback for the purpose of reducing  the vertical movement of the playback picture           710       INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL  GENERATOR       Select the test signal to be output from the internal test signal generator   When    SG     is selected using the VIDEO INPUT SEL button  the internal test  signal generator operates to output the selected test signal  This signal can  also be recorded    BB  Black Burst   Black burst signal   CB75  75  Color Bars   75  color bar signal   CB100  100  Color Bars   100  color bar signal   The factory default settings for each line mode are as follows    In 525 U  525 J  line modes  CB75  75  Color Bars    In 625 line mode  CB100  100  Color Bars              7 3 Extended Menu       Menu items in the 700s  relating to video control                                                    Item Item name Settings  number  713 VIDEO SETUP REFERENCE Select whether to remove the setup  7 5   from the input analog video  Sub item signals and whether to add the setup  7 5   to the output analog video  signals  when 525 U  or 525 J  line mode is selected    1 INPUT LEVEL Whether to remove the setup  7 5   from the input analog video signals   0 0   Do not remove   7 5   Remove   The factory default settings for each line mode are as follows   525 U  line mode  7 5   525 J  line mode  0 0   2 OUTPUT LEVEL Whether to add the
162. for transfer of the required frame is 0    segment only   lt transfer size gt  specifies the number of video frames to  transfer  specify O to transfer to the end of the file    e A segment greater than the file size   Input example  SITE REPF Clip C0001 MXF 5 150  Transfer  cannot be specified  C0001 MXF  Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to  e This command cannot be used when   frame 155    the path names contains a space   Use the SITE REPFL command  instead   SITE REPEL    Sends an MXF file from the specified  SITE REPFL  lt SP gt      lt path name gt      lt SP gt   lt start frame gt   path on this unit to the remote  lt SP gt   lt transfer size gt   lt CRLF gt   computer  This command allows you to  specify a segment in the body of the  lt path name gt  specifies the path name of the file to transfer   MXF file  composed of video and audio   Enclose the path name in double quotation marks   data   for transfer of the required  lt start frame gt  specifies an offset from the start of the file   segment only  Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset  the first  frame is 0    Note    lt transfer size gt  specifies the number of video frames to  A segment greater than the file size transfer  specify O to transfer to the end of the file    cannot be specified   Input example  SITE REPFL    Clip sakura 0001 MXF    5 150   Transfer sakura 0001 MXF  Body data is transferred only  from frame 6 to frame 155    SITE FSTS Acquires the system status of this un
163. from time to    time  Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version  but may differ in detail to address new problems  or concerns     Each version is given a distinguishing version number  If the Program specifies a version number of this License which  applies to it and    any later version     you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version  or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation  If the Program does not specify a version number  of this License  you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation     10  If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different   write to the author to ask for permission  For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation  write  to the Free Software Foundation  we sometimes make exceptions for this  Our decision will be guided by the two goals  of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software  generally     NO WARRANTY    11  BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  PROGRAM  TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED  IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM    AS IS     WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND  EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING  BUT NOT  LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTAB
164. g periods of time    e Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel  Servicing  is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any  way  such as power supply cord or plug is damaged  liquid  has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus   the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture  does  not operate normally  or has been dropped     To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock   do not expose this apparatus to rain or  moisture     To avoid electrical shock  do not open the  cabinet  Refer servicing to qualified  personnel only     THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED     CAUTION   The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing  and no objects filled with liquid  such as vases  shall be placed  on the apparatus     The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source   mains  as long as it is connected to the wall outlet  even if the  unit itself has been turned off     Do not install the appliance in a confined space  such as a  book case or built in cabinet     This apparatus is provided with a main switch on the rear  panel  Install this apparatus so that user can access the main  switch easily     RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  DO NOT OPEN       CAUTION  TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK     DO NOT REMOVE COVER  OR BACK      NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE     REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL        This symbol is intended to alert the user to  the presence of uninsulated    dangerous  voltage    within the product   s enc
165. g procedure are those that  appear in the video panel  and on a monitor to which the  output of the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT   SUPER  connector is input    Proceed as follows                                                                                                                       1 Press the MENU button     The setup menu appears in the video panel and on the  external monitor     2 Hold down the COUNTER SEL button  and press the  SET button     The screen switches to the maintenance menu     3 Use the 4    buttons to select    SETUP  MAINTENANCE        MAINTENANCE MENU  DRIVE MAINTENANCE  ADJUST  CHECK  BATTERY CONFIG  AUDIO CONFIG  NETWORK CONFIG  SETUP MAINTENANCE   gt   SERVICE SUPPORT  OTHERS             4 Press the  gt  button     5 Use the 4 9 buttons to select    EXTENDED MENU           MAINTENANCE MENU   SETUP MAINTENANCE    EXTENDED MENU i dis    SETUP BANK4  SAVE MENU DATA  LOAD MENU DATA  AU BANK RECALL   RESET ALL SETUP    off             6 Press the  gt  button     7 Press the   button to select    ENABLE           MAINTENANCE MENU   SETUP MAINTENANCE   EXTENDED MENU      DISABLE        ENABLE    dis             8 Press the SET button     When you next display the menu and change the item  display  the extended menu will appear after the basic  menu        7 3 3 Using UMID Data    To perform operations from interviewing to editing  effectively and to detect audio visual materials easily  when reusing them  metadata that provides additional  inform
166. hannels selected with extended menu  item 837 and 838    AUDIO MONITOR CHANNEL  ARRANGE      The factory default is for channels 1  left  and 2  right  to   be selected    You can select whether to monitor both of the selected   channels or only one  by pressing this button with the   SHIFT button held down  Each press selects stereo  right    or left    ST  Stereo audio is output from the PHONES jack   Monaural audio  the left and right channels mixed  is  output from the built in speaker    R  The right channel audio is output from the PHONES  jack and the built in speaker    L  The left channel audio is output from the PHONES jack  and the built in speaker     2 2 Control Panel 1 5    Sed JO suonouny pue sewen zsejdeyp Mh    Sued JO suoyouny pue sawe Zz Ja deyo WA    16     5  Recording and playback control section       PREV button    PLAY button  NEXT button  P PREV   PLAY fe STOP REC  Se  IA   ror  F REV LF FWD eno     STOP button      REC button                                                   PREV  previous  button   Press this button  turning it on  to show the first frame of   the current clip  While the first frame of a clip is shown    pressing this button jumps to the beginning of the previous  clip    This button is also used together with other buttons for the   following operations    Reverse direction high speed search  Hold down the  PLAY button  and press this button  A high speed  search in the reverse direction is carried out    Displaying the first fram
167. haracter to set     1 ORepeat steps 8 and 9 as required     When you are setting the    NUMERIC    item  you can  press the RESET button to return the initial value of  the serial number to 00001  factory default setting      11 Carry out steps 7 to 10 to set the other item     1 2 Press the SET button   The title is saved     To check the titles of recorded clips   Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  screen  and select the clip whose title you want to check   The title of the selected clip appears at the upper left of the  screen     See    Cuing up a desired clip     page 52  for more  information about the thumbnail screen     The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every  time a title is generated  When the value reaches 99999   the next number restarts from 00001    Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the  serial number after recording several clips or the same is  true depending on the value setting  Care should be taken  when setting the serial number    The    PREFIX    setting is saved in memory banks  but the     NUMERIC    setting is not saved  see page 96      6 1 Overview       6 1 4 Assigning User Defined Clip  and Clip List Names    The following standard format names are assigned  automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or  recorded by XDCAM devices    Clips  C0001 MXF to C4999 MXF   Clip lists  EO001E01 SMI to EO099E01 SMI   This unit can handle clips and clip lists with user defined  names as well as
168. he MENU button twice in succession     The time zone is reset to the factory default when you  execute the maintenance menu item    RESET ALL  SETUP     You will need to set it again  The date and time  are not reset        3 5 Superimposed Text  Information    The video signal output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER   connector or the SDI OUT  SUPER  connector contains  superimposed text information  including time code  menu  settings  and alarm messages     Adjusting the text display    You can adjust the position  size and type of the  superimposed text using basic menu items 002  003  005   009  011  and 012     For details  see 7 2 1    Items in the Basic Setup Menu      page 90      Information displayed       DType of time data            Time code reader drop frame  mark  for 525 line mode only      Time code generator drop  frame mark  for 525 line  mode only         Ti t  ime data DVITC field mark       lol   olaki Eloi FI    mefe lo              9 Playback condition  mark    Operation mode    Menu setting states             The display shown above corresponds to the factory  default settings of the unit  You can change the type of  information to be displayed in the lower line of the display  by changing the setting of basic menu item 005     DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT        For details  see 7 2 1    Items in the Basic Setup Menu      page 90      3 5 Superimposed Text Information    suolyeredalg    sa deyo                          suoeredaid     Ja deyo              
169. hether or not they are linked directly  with the Library itself     As an exception to the Sections above  you may also combine or link a    work that uses the Library    with the Library  to produce a work containing portions of the Library  and distribute that work under terms of your choice  provided  that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer   s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such  modifications     You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its  use are covered by this License  You must supply a copy of this License  If the work during execution displays  copyright notices  you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them  as well as a reference directing  the user to the copy of this License  Also  you must do one of these things     a  Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including  whatever changes were used in the work  which must be distributed under Sections   and 2 above   and  if the work  is an executable linked with the Library  with the complete machine readable    work that uses the Library     as object  code and or source code  so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable    Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    10     11     containing the modified Library   It is understood that the user who changes the contents of 
170. ic mode  When you  operate a VDR in E E mode  input  video and or audio signals pass    through electric circuits only and  then come out from the output  connectors  without passing through  electromagnetic conversion circuits  such as recording heads     Essence mark   A type of metadata that may be set for  a specified frame    For more efficient searches   XDCAM equipment records essence  marks as part of Non RealTime  metadata  and uses them to display  thumbnails     i LINK   Another name for the IEEE1394   1995 standards and their revisions   XDCAM uses the i LINK interface to  transfer DV streams by the AV C  protocol  and to read and write  MPEG IMX and DVCAM data files  by FAM  file access mode      Metadata   Information about the properties of  video and audio content  XDCAM  records metadata such as UMIDs and  essence marks  and the supplied  PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software can  be used to record information such as  titles and comments     MXF   Material eXchange Format  A file  exchange format developed by the  Pro MPEG Forum  Equipment from  different manufacturers can  exchange files in this format     Non audio   General term for audio signals other  than linear PCM  such as Dolby E D  and Dolby Digital  AC 3       XDCAM can record non audio as an  input signal    1  Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories     Non drop frame mode   A mode of advancing time code  which ignores the difference in frame  values between real time and the time  code  Using this m
171. icense to do so  and all its terms and conditions for copying  distributing or modifying the  Program or works based on it     Each time you redistribute the Program  or any work based on the Program   the recipient automatically receives a  license from the original licensor to copy  distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions  You  may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients    exercise of the rights granted herein    You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License     If  as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason  not limited to  patent issues   conditions are imposed on you  whether by court order  agreement or otherwise  that contradict the  conditions of this License  they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License  If you cannot distribute so as  to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations  then as a  consequence you may not distribute the Program at all  For example  if a patent license would not permit royalty free  redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you  then the only way you  could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program     If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance  the balance of the  section is intended 
172. id  or data Reset the items in the setup menu    recalled with the maintenance menu  item    SETUP MAINTENANCE            AUTO BANK RECALL    is invalid    Exchg batt  on  limit  off NVRAM battery is exhausted  It is time to exchange the battery on the  board  Contact your Sony service  representative    LOW BATT  on  limit  off Battery pack power is low  Exchange with a charged battery pack    BATT EMPTY  on  limit  off Battery pack power is exhausted  See 3 2 3    Using a Battery Pack     page 33   for more information about exchanging  battery packs           a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    When a disc is inserted                                  Message in time   Display Description Action  data display condition      Unknown FS  on  limit  off The loaded disc was formatted by an Eject or format the disc   unknown file system   See 3 6 5    Formatting a Disc     page 39  for  more information about formatting   No FS  on  limit  off The file system cannot be detected  Eject the disc   ILL  Disc  on  limit  off An unsupported disc was inserted   Salvage NG on  limit  off Recovery of disc contents  salvage  See 3 6 7    Handling of Discs When  failed  Recording Does Not End Normally   Salvage Function      page 40    525 60 Clip on  limit A disc recorded in NTSC format was Use a disc recorded with the PAL system   inserted when this unit is in 625 line  mode  PAL system    625 50 Clip on  limit A disc recorded in PAL format was Use a disc recorded with 
173. ided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing  and reuse of software generally     NO WARRANTY    15     16     BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  LIBRARY  TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW    EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER  PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY    AS IS    WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND  EITHER EXPRESSED  OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE  QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU  SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE  DEFECTIVE  YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING  REPAIR OR CORRECTION     IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY  COPYRIGHT HOLDER  OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE  LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE  BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES  INCLUDING ANY GENERAL   SPECIAL  INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO  USE THE LIBRARY  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED  INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY  TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE   EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN  ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
174. ignated software packages typically  libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it  You can use it too  but we suggest you  first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any  particular case  based on the explanations below     When we speak of free software  we are referring to freedom of use  not price  Our General Public Licenses are designed  to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software  and charge for this service if you wish   that  you receive source code or can get it if you want it  that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free  programs  and that you are informed that you can do these things     To protect your rights  we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to    surrender these rights  These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library  or if you modify it     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    139    eer A    sex pueddy AM    140    For example  if you distribute copies of the library  whether gratis or for a fee  you must give the recipients all the rights  that we gave you  You must make sure that they  too  receive or can get the source code  If you link other code with the  library  you must provide complete object files to the recipients  so that they can relink them with th
175. ile operations between this unit and a remote computer  can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol  called  FTP below      Preparations    T Connect the network connectors of this unit and a  remote computer with a network cable  see  connections illustration on page 26   Or connect this  unit to the network to which the remote computer is  connected  see connections illustration on page 26      2 Set the IP address and other network setting items for  this unit     For details  see    To change network settings     page  115      If network settings have already been made  Check the IP address of this unit     For details  see    To check the assigned IP address      page 115      3 Set the remote control switch to    NETWORK     see  page 12         6 3 1 Making FTP Connections    FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer  can be made with either of the following    e The command prompt   e FTP client software    This section explains how to use the command prompt  For  more information about using FTP client software  refer to  the documentation of the FTP client software on your  system     An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use  Unicode characters other than ASCH characters   Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8     To log in  If this unit is connected to a remote computer with a FAM    connection  first exit file operations on the FAM  connection  see page 79       T Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the  foll
176. ime  and time zone           7 5 2 System Menu Operations       MENU button    SET button  SHIFT button         RESET button          sug   Thuma  Ai                 ja   wp  FOO005          bl e                                                                                                                Arrow buttons             7 5 System Menu    117    a Mi      snuey  Z Ja deyo WA    118    To display disc status and clip status    Insert a disc and proceed as follows       Hold down the SHIFT button and press the MENU  button     The system menu appears in the video panel or on an  external monitor     2 Press the 4 button or Y button to select    DISC  MENU     then press the  gt  button     The DISC MENU page appears     3 Press the 4 button or   button to select    STATUS      then press the  gt  button     The    STATUS    menu item appears     4 Display the disc status or the status of the current clip     To display the disc status  Press the 4 button or   button to select    DISC     then  press the  gt  button     The status of the loaded disc appears        DISC STATUS    USER ID   no ID     TITLE    no name   REMAIN   029 min  REWRITE   0002 times  SALVAGE   OK  FILE SYSTEM   OK          TO MENU   MENU KEY       To display the status of the current clip  Press the 4 button or     button to select    CLIP     then  press the  gt  button     The status of the clip at the current position appears    When the current clip changes because of playback or  a search  
177. ime code data           7 3 2 Extended Menu Operations    The extended menu can be used with the same procedures    as in the basic menu     However  since with the factory default settings the  extended menu is not displayed  it is first necessary to    enable display of the extended menu     See    Basic setup menu operations     page 94  for more                   2 Usea ballpoint pen or other sharp implement to set the    information about how to select menu items and how to leftmost of the DIP switches on the right side to the  change their values  ON  top  position    Enabling display of the extended menu Note    To enable display of the extended menu  an internal switch Do not use a pencil for this operation  as graphite    must be set to on  and extended menu display must be    deposits can cause short circuits and lead to failure     enabled in the maintenance menu   The internal switch is  set to on when the unit is shipped from the factory  Unless  you have set it to off  there is no need to change the switch    setting      To set the internal switch to on    1 Using a Phillips screwdriver  remove the cover on the  rear panel of this unit    7 3 Extended Menu                                                                                                                      h ada vec    Set this switch to    ON           3 Replace the cover     Tighten the screws firmly     To enable extended menu display in the  maintenance menu   The menu screens in the followin
178. impossible to record video audio  or to play back   the content recorded on the disc  The discs should be   handled and stored carefully    e Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the  cartridge    e Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage    e Do not disassemble the cartridge    e The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for  indexing discs  Apply the label in the correct position     Storage   e Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct  sunlight  or in other places where the temperature or  humidity is high      Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain  ingress    e Store cartridges in their cases     Care of the discs   e Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using  a soft dry cloth       If condensation forms  allow ample time to dry before  use        3 6 3 Write Protecting Discs    To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental  erasure  move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of    3 6 Handling Discs    the disc in the direction of the arrow  as shown in the  following figure        Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab          Slide in the direction of the arrow  Write Inhibit tab settings    SAVE   gt  SAVE   gt     Recording enabled Recording disabled             You can lock individual clips to prevent them from being  deleted  For details  see    Locking clips     page 55         3 6 4 Loading and Unloading a Disc    When the on standby switch indicator is lit green  
179. ing    320 DIGITAL AUDIO PB PROCESS ON   Select the treatment of audio playback at edit points    EDIT POINT cut  Carry out a cut  possibly resulting in audio discontinuities at the edit  point     fade  Fade out and fade in    335 OUTPUT REFERENCE SEL Select the reference signal of this unit           ref  ref  video   Use the signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector as  the reference signal    auto  According to the operation mode  automatically select either the  signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector or the input video signal  selected with the VIDEO INPUT SEL button as the reference signal     For more details  see the following item    External synchronization to  reference signal generators     page 100      The input digital audio signals and video signals must be synchronized  with the reference signal input to the REF VIDEO IN connector           7 3 Extended Menu    99    Gi   HN    snuey  Z Ja deyo HA    100    External synchronization to reference signal generators    The internal reference signal generator is synchronized  either to a reference signal input to the REF VIDEO IN  connector or an input video signal  Depending on the  settings of extended menu items 335 and 308  and the input    signal selection  the external synchronization status is as  shown in the following table    The video signals are output always synchronized to the  internal reference signal                                                                                              
180. ing data is transferred  depending on whether   lt path name gt  specifies a directory or file   e Directory specified  A list of the file names only in the  specified directory  e No specification  A list of the file names only in the current  directory   The wildcard characters          any string  and          any  character  may be used in  lt path name gt    Input example 1  NLST  I  Input example 2  NLST Clip   MXF  RETR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the   RETR  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt        specified path on this unit to the current  directory on the remote computer        Input example  RETR Clip C0001 MXF          6 3 FTP File Operations    83    suonesedo aji4 9 Ja deyo Mil    suoesedo aiilq 9 Ja deyo WAN    84       Command name  STOR    Description    Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the  specified path on the remote computer  to the current directory on this unit   Depending on the type of file  transferred  the following files are  created   e C  MXF file            C M01 XML file  metadata      C S01 MXF file  proxy AV data   e E E01 SMI file P          E M01 XML file  metadata     a     0001 to 4999   b     0001 to 0099   c  With firmware version 1 5 and higher   the unit can handle files with user   defined names in the    C     or    E E01     part     e For C  MXF files  the UMID of the  copy source file is not saved   However  it is saved if an immediately  preceding SITE UMMD extended  command has been issued    e For C  MX
181. ion       Display  Name    Description    Green condition   There is no problem with the  playback condition  This unit  and the disc can be used just  as they are  This  corresponds to the    green     channel condition indicator of  a VTR          Yellow condition   The playback condition has  deteriorated to some degree   There are no read errors  but  you should take the action  described in the next section   This corresponds to the     yellow    channel condition  indicator of a VTR        Red condition    The playback condition has  deteriorated  There are no  read errors     but you should  take the action described in  the next section  This  corresponds to the    red     channel condition indicator of  a VTR                    a  Read errors will occur if the playback condition continues to deteriorate   If a read error occurs  a    Disc Error     alarm appears in the time data  display  the picture freezes  and audio is muted     To display playback condition marks  set basic menu item  012    CONDITION DISPLAY ON VIDEO MONITOR     to    ena     and set basic menu item 005    DISPLAY  INFORMATION SELECT    to    T amp sta        For details about operation  see 7 2 2    Basic Menu  Operations     page 94      Playback condition displays    You can be alerted in advance to deteriorating playback  conditions and to error correction rates which are  approaching their limits   Deteriorating playback may be due to the following  causes   e Scratches and dust on the disc
182. ip is deleted  or all clips are deleted     You can use the THUMBNAIL MENU to delete the  selected clip or all clips  For details  see page 56     To format discs    See 3 6 5    Formatting a Disc     page 39      To set the date and time    See 3 4    Setting the Date and Time     page 34      7 5 System Menu    119    Gi NM       120          Maintenance and  Troubleshooting   chapter             8 1 Periodic Maintenance       8 1 1 Digital Hours Meter    The digital hours meter can provide six items of  information about the operational history of the unit  This  information appears in the time data display section  in the  video panel  and on an external monitor to which the  output of the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT   SUPER  connector is input  Use the information as a  guide in scheduling periodic maintenance     For periodic maintenance  consult your Sony dealer     Display modes of the digital hours meter  H01  OPERATION mode    Displays the total number of hours the unit has been  powered on in units of 1 hour     H11  OPERATION mode  resettable    Same as HO1 except that the count is resettable    This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  parts     H12  LASER PARAMETER mode  resettable   This shows a counter of the cumulative light output time  by the optical head in units of hours  D The count is  resettable    This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  the optical head     1  The counter advances at different rates during recordi
183. is in the I  position  or a battery is loaded  this switches the PDW R1  between the operating  I  and standby      states  When  the switch is moved to the I position  the indicator lights   When the switch is moved to the    position  the indicator  goes off    When operating the PDW R1 from an AC power supply   normally leave the AC power switch in the I position  and  switch the PDW R1 between the operating and standby  states using the on standby switch     2 2 Control Panel       Remote control switch and NETWORK access  indicator   Different positions of the switch allow different operations   as follows    NETWORK  Enables access to the network  The  indicator lights when an external network device is  being accessed  In this state  operation from the  control panel is not possible    LOCAL  Enables operation from the control panel    REMOTE  Enables remote control of the PDW R1 from  a device connected to the   5400  i LINK  connector  or REMOTE connector on the side panel    Use extended menu item 214    REMOTE  INTERFACE    to select which of the connectors is  used     See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108   for more information about how to make extended  menu Settings        KEY INHI  key inhibit  switch   Setting this switch to ON lights the KEY INHI indicator  and disables the switches and buttons that are set to    dis     with extended menu item 118    KEY INHIBIT            1  Time data settings section          INT EXT RP188 switch       PRESE
184. is unit is shipped with the line mode still unset   Therefore you need to set the line mode before using the  unit   The unit cannot be used unless the line mode is set    Once it is set  the line mode is retained even when the unit  is powered off     Setting procedure    Use the following procedure to set the line mode        Time data display                                         AC power switch  rear panel  a            226       go WS                                                             2  e   E  kid El a                   oinin                         Ss       2 3    a  If you are using DC power or a battery pack  connect the DC power  or mount the battery pack on the battery pack shoe beforehand              1 Power the unit on           Select         appears in the time data display           2 With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  dial     When you rotate the jog dial in the forward direction   the            part of the display changes in the sequence  525U  gt  525J  gt  625  When you rotate it in the reverse  direction  the display changes in the sequence 625  gt   525J  gt  525U                       Setting Line mode   525U 525 U   NTSC  areas outside Japan   525J 525 J   NTSC  Japan    625 625  PAL                3 When the desired setting appears  release the  SHUTTLE button        Push SET       appears                    To redo the selection  Repeat step 2    4 Press the SET button      Turn OFF       appears              5 Power the 
185. isplay section   The values may  appear in a different format in the video panel and on an  external monitor  In this case  the video panel values are  shown in parentheses   Underlined values are the factory  defaults     Menu items in the 100s  relating to the control panels       Item number  101    Item name    SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL  ENABLE    Settings    Select how the unit enters the shuttle or jog mode    dial  dial direct   Press the SHUTTLE or JOG button or  except during  recording editing  turn the jog dial or shuttle dial    key  via search key   Press the SHUTTLE or JOG button        105    REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM    Select whether or not to display a warning when the reference video  signal is not supplied or is out of phase with the input video signal   off  No warning    on  Flash the STOP button as a warning        107    REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING    Select whether or not to flash the REC INHI indicator when recording is  prevented  see    REC INHI  recording inhibited  indicator    on page 18    off  Light the REC INHI indicator    on  Flash the REC INHI indicator        108    AUTO EE SELECT    When a disc is inserted  select the operation modes in which input video  and audio signals are automatically handled in E E mode    S F R  stop f fwd f rev   In stop fast forward fast reverse modes   stop  In stop mode   off  Do not put the unit into E E mode automatically           109    FORCED EE WHEN DISC UNLOAD    When    off    is selected in menu item 108 
186. it    SITE FSTS  lt CRLF gt   One of the following status codes is  sent   0  Initial state  or no disc is loaded   1  File system mount is OK   3  File system mount is not OK   SITE MEID Acquires the media ID of the disc SITE MEID  lt CRLF gt   loaded in this unit   SITE FUNC Acquires the function and version of the   SITE FUNC  lt CRLF gt   extended commands   Information is sent in the following  format    lt main function gt   lt SP gt   lt branch  function gt   lt SP gt   lt branch function  version gt   For XDCAM  sent in a format like    200  MXF DISK 1        200    is a response  code    SITE UMMD When C  MXF file is sent with the SITE UMMD  lt CRLF gt   STOR command  the copy source  UMID is saved if this command is  invoked immediately before the STOR  command   SITE DF 2 Acquires the amount of free disc space    SITE DF  lt CRLF gt        6 3 FTP File Operations          Command name    SITE CHMOD              Description    Locks and unlocks clips  Also sets  permissions for directories and files in  the General directory        Command syntax    SITE CHMOD  lt SP gt   lt flag gt   lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt     Specify one of the following values in  lt flag gt   according to  the specification in  lt path name gt    e When a clip is specified in  lt path name gt   444  Lock   666  Unlock   e When a directory in the General directory is specified in   lt path name gt   555  Forbid writing to the directory   777  Allow writing to the directory   e Wh
187. itor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector        7 2 Basic Setup Menu          Item number  006    Item name  LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE    Settings    Determine which recording and playback control buttons on the control  panel are enabled when this unit is controlled from external equipment   dis  all disable   All buttons and switches are disabled     st amp ej  stop  amp  eject    Only the STOP button and EJECT button are enabled        ena  all enable   All buttons and switches are enabled                          007 TAPE TIMER DISPLAY Determine whether to display the counter in 12 hour mode or 24 hour mode         12H      12H    12 hour mode   24H  24 hour mode   009 CHARACTER TYPE Determine the type of characters such as time code displayed on the   monitor  2    white  White letters on a black background    black  Black letters on a white background    W out  White letters with black outline    B out  Black letters with white outline    a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector    Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor    011 CHARACTER V SIZE Determine the vertical size of characters such as time code displayed on the   monitor  2    x1  Standard size   x2  2 times standard size   a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input sign
188. l the setting modification  screen appears     5 Using the 4    buttons to select the desired setting     6 Press the SET button     This saves the new setting  and the menu disappears  from the video panel or an external monitor     To cancel changing a setting   Before pressing the SET button  press the MENU  button    The menu disappears from the video panel or an  external monitor  without saving the new setting     To change network settings    To change network settings  carry out steps 1 to 3 in the  procedure of    Basic maintenance menu operations    above   to display the NETWORK CONFIG menu item  then carry  out the following operations     For details of the settings  consult your network  administrator     When the IP address is assigned automatically  Check that the network cable is connected to this unit  before carrying out the operation                                                                                                                                                  Using the 4    buttons to select    DHCP      Press the  gt  button     Press the   button to select    ENABLE        A    N        Press the SET button     To check the assigned IP address   In the NETWORK CONFIG menu  using the 4 7  buttons to select    IP ADDRESS     then press the  gt   button     If the IP address cannot be assigned  this is shown as     000 000 000 000     In this case  consult the network  administrator     To set the IP address  First set DHCP to    DISABLE   
189. lay an announcement including an appropriate  copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty  or else  saying that you provide a warranty  and that users  may redistribute the program under these conditions  and telling the user how to view a copy of this License    Exception  if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement  your work based  on the Program is not required to print an announcement      These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole  If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from  the Program  and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves  then this License  and  its terms  do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works  But when you distribute the same  sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program  the distribution of the whole must be on the terms  of this License  whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole  and thus to each and every part  regardless of who wrote it     Thus  it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you  rather   the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program     In addition  mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program  or with a work based on  the Program  on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does no
190. lip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4   C0001     C0002   C0003   C0004           Clip list name    E       Thumbnails of selected clips             Clip name    C0006    23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00                   Clip lists   Data called a    clip list    is created when you use the scene  selection function to select desired clips from the clips  stored on a disc    Clip lists have names beginning with    E    for example     E0001     You can save up to 99 clip lists on a disc     5 1 Overview    Sub clips  clips in clip lists    The specified clips  or parts of clips  in a clip list are called     sub clips     Sub clips are virtual data specifying ranges in  the original clips  Clip data in the original clips is not  overwritten     Clip 1 Clip 2   C0001   C0002   Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2   Sub clip 3    Example  Clip list  E0001           i Clip3  i  C0003                   Clip list editing  current clip list     Clip lists cannot be edited on disc  To edit clip lists  you  need to load them  one at a time  into the unit memory   The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory  is called the    current clip list       The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation  and editing  Clip list playback also uses the current clip  list    After creating and editing a clip list  you need to save it to  disc        Unit memory       Current clip list    and reordering sub clips            Clip list playback    Can be edited  adding  deleting  and thumbnail    displ
191. lips with the following   operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Moves to the  previous or next clip    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT    button held down  Moves to the first or last clip     Press the 4 or   button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switches to the previous or next page    Does not switch when there is only one page      3 With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button     The scene selection window appears        To return to the original screen  Press the RESET button     4 Press the SET button     The selected clip is added to the current clip list as a  sub clip    At the same time  the scene selection window closes  and you return to the original thumbnail screen     5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you have added all of the  desired clips to the current clip list     You can select the same clip any number of times     5 2 Creating Clip Lists    The scene selection window displays thumbnails of   the sub clips that have been added to the current clip  list  The cursor in the window indicates the position   where the next sub clip will be added           Total duration of sub clips in  the current clip list       Cursor  indicates where the  next sub clip will be added     Thumbnails of sub clips already  added to the current clip list          To move the cursor in the scene selection window  After carrying out step 3 to display the scene selection  window  press the   or  gt  button     6 When you have finished selecting all the 
192. lled a    work that uses the Library     Such a work  in isolation  is not a derivative work  of the Library  and therefore falls outside the scope of this License     However  linking a    work that uses the Library    with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the  Library  because it contains portions of the Library   rather than a    work that uses the library     The executable is  therefore covered by this License  Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables     When a    work that uses the Library    uses material from a header file that is part of the Library  the object code for the  work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not  Whether this is true is especially  significant if the work can be linked without the Library  or if the work is itself a library  The threshold for this to be  true is not precisely defined by law     If such an object file uses only numerical parameters  data structure layouts and accessors  and small macros and small  inline functions  ten lines or less in length   then the use of the object file is unrestricted  regardless of whether it is  legally a derivative work   Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under  Section 6      Otherwise  if the work is a derivative of the Library  you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms  of Section 6  Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6  w
193. locations exposed to direct sunlight     If playback conditions have deteriorated   If a yellow or red playback condition mark appears  check   the following points    Whether the disc displays the same playback condition  on other XDCAM devices  If so  the surface of the  disc may be dirty or scratched  or the performance of  the recording layers on the disc may have worsened  due to age  Do not use discs with these symptoms    Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device  displays the same playback conditions  If so  the  performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated   Check the total optical output time     3 5 Superimposed Text Information    37    suolyeredalg    Ja deyo                          suoesedaid E Ja deyo                             3 6 Handling Discs       3 6 1 Discs Used for Recording and  Playback    This disc recorder uses the following disc for recording  and playback  PFD23 Professional Disc 1   capacity 23 3  GB     1  Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation     It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or  playback       Blu ray Disc   e Professional Disc for Data       3 6 2 Notes on Handling    Handling   The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge  and is   designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or   fingerprints  However  if the cartridge is subjected to a   severe shock  for example by dropping it  this can result in   damage or scratching of the disc  If the disc is scratched  it   may be 
194. lost is as follows      Quick salvage  From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the  interruption of recording      Full salvage  From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the  interruption of recording     Quick salvage    When the unit is powered on again after a recording  interruption due to power off  with the disc still loaded in  the unit  clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data  stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the  disc    Processing time is about 5 seconds     Full salvage    When a disc that was manually ejected from a device  subjected to a recording interruption due to power off is  loaded into this unit  clips are reconstructed on the basis of  markers recorded on the disc  Nonvolatile memory cannot  be used  so processing takes longer than for a quick  salvage  about 30 seconds  although it depends on the state  of the disc     Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage     T Insert the disc on which recording did not end  normally     The message    Salvage      appears     2 Doone of the following     To salvage   Press the SET button    Processing begins and the message    Executing      appears     If the REC INHI indicator  see page 18  is lit  the   message    EJECT     appears  Eject the disc  set the  Write Inhibit tab to the recording enable position    and insert the disc again    This operation cannot be cancelled once it begins     The message    Complete    appears when processing  finishes  If the message reads    Incomplete  
195. losure that  may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute  a risk of electric shock to persons     This symbol is intended to alert the user to  the presence of important operating and  maintenance  servicing  instructions in the  literature accompanying the appliance     WARNING  THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR USA  ONLY     If used in USA  use the UL LISTED power cord specified  below   DO NOT USE ANY OTHER POWER CORD     Plug Cap Parallel blade with ground pin   NEMA 5 15P Configuration   Cord Type SJT  three 16 or 18 AWG wires  Length Minimum 1 5 m  4 ft  11 in    Less than  2 5 m  8 ft  3 in    Rating Minimum 10 A  125 V    Using this unit at a voltage other than 120 V may require the  use of a different line cord or attachment plug  or both  To  reduce the risk of fire or electric shock  refer servicing to  qualified service personnel     WARNING  THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR OTHER   COUNTRIES    1  Use the approved Power Cord  3 core mains lead    Appliance Connector Plug with earthing contacts that  conforms to the safety regulations of each country if  applicable    2  Use the Power Cord  3 core mains lead  Appliance  Connector Plug conforming to the proper ratings  Voltage   Ampere      If you have questions on the use of the above Power Cord   Appliance Connector Plug  please consult a qualified service  personnel     When installing the installation space must be secured in   consideration of the ventilation and service operation    e Do not block the ventilation
196. ls during playback  the insertion  line can be specified only for recording    b  In the DVCAM format  VITC is recorded as VAUX  Video Auxiliary  data   Because VITC is inserted into video signals by the VITC generator only during  playback  the insertion line can be specified only for playback                 602 VITC POSITION SEL 2 Select a line into which to insert VITC signals for IMX recording signals     and DVCAM playback signals       12 H  12 line     18 H  18 line     20 H  20 line   in 525 U  525 J  line  modes   9 H  9 line     21 H  21 line     22 H  22 line   in 625 line mode   You can insert the VITC signal in two places  To insert it in two places   set both items 601 and 602   a  In the IMX format  VITC is inserted as video signals in vertical blanking sections   Because these signals are output as video signals during playback  the insertion  line can be specified only for recording   b  In the DVCAM format  VITC is recorded as VAUX  Video Auxiliary  data   Because VITC is inserted into video signals by the VITC generator only during  playback  the insertion line can be specified only for playback   605 TCG REGEN MODE Select the signal to be regenerated when the time code generator is in  the regeneration mode  i e   when the PRESET REGEN switch is set to  REGEN    TC amp UB  Both the time code and user bits are regenerated   TC  Only the time code is regenerated   UB  Only the user bits are regenerated   607 U BIT BINARY GROUP FLAG Select the user bits to b
197. m the settings    Maintenance menu item    AUDIO    of this unit  As CONFIG           DATA LENGTH    2  e Number of quantizing bits and e Maintenance menu item    AUDIO 3  recording channels CONFIG           NON AUDIO INPUT    3  e Handling of digital audio signals  audio g  or non audio  See 7 4 2    Maintenance Menu Operations        page 114  about how to make these 2  settings  F  ILL  REF  on  limit  off The playback system and recording Input a reference video signal to the player 3  system are not synchronized  and recorder  2  ILL  REC  on  limit A sync error between encoder and input   Contact your Sony service representative   signal occurred during recording   ILL  PLAY  on  limit An audio video phase error occurred  during playback   MEM  Full  on  limit A memory write error occurred   MEM  Empty on  limit Playback data in memory was lost  and             playback stopped              8 4 Alarms    129    Buyooyse qnol  pue soueueyuley g seydeyo HAI    130                      recording processing  because  recording is being done while avoiding  defects on the disc        Message in time   Display Description Action  data display condition a   List Exists on  limit  off An attempt was made to edit a clip Delete all clip lists   referenced by sub clips   See 5 3 2    Deleting Clip Lists From a Disc      page 69    Clip End  on  limit  off An attempt was made to edit across clip   Editing across multiple clips is not possible   boundaries   Recording on  limit More
198. n 625 line mode  to     thru       e In 525 line mode  wide picture information may not be output if VITC signal  insertion position is set to line 20 in extended menu item 601 or 602        Menu items in the 800s  relating to audio control       Item number  802    Item name    DIGITAL AUDIO MUTING IN  SHUTTLE MODE    Settings    Set the audio muting conditions during shuttle playback   off  Not muted                    on  Muted    807 AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE Set the output timing of digital audio playback signals  SDI  AES EBU  only   with 80H as a reference position  Output timing is earlier for  values smaller than 80H and later for values greater than 80H   80H   128 samples   approx  2 7 ms  80H  1 sample   approx  20 us    0  0  HEX      80  80  HEX      FF  FF  HEX    Values can be set in this  range    808 INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL Select the operation of the internal audio test signal generator    GENERATOR silnc  silence   Silent signal   1kHz  1kHz sine   1 kHz   20 dB FS sine wave signal   When you select SG as the audio input in the input selection section of  the control panel  the audio test signal generated by the internal audio  test signal generator is input    815 AUDIO SAMPLING RATE Select the mode of operation of the sampling rate converter for AES    CONVERTER EBU input to channels 1 to 4   off  Do not operate   on  Operate   820 AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 CH2 SELECT   Select the signals to be output from the AUDIO OUT 1 3 and AUDIO       OUT 2 4 connectors    line  line
199. n extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to    off     With    firmware version 1 4x and lower  only the most recently recorded clip may  be deleted  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  any clip may be selected  and deleted    e  Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM   f  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  when the    C     part of a C  MXF  file name is changed  a C MO1 XML with the same name in the    C     part  is also changed automatically    g  When a C  MXF file is created  a C MO1 XML file with the same name  in the    C     part is created automatically     6 1 Overview    73    suojeredo aiiq 9 Ja deyo AN    h  When a C  MXF file is deleted  the C M01 XML file with the same name clips on that disc   The only possible operations are    in the    C     part is also deleted automatically  playback and disc formatting      Writing of clips with user defined names   Notes   f   ae   Locking of clips   e Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory    Deletion of clips  except the last recorded clip    j When the following operations  supported by veri    1 5    If you attempt to write a C  MXF file which does not  and higher XDCAM devices  are carried out on a disc  meet the conditions specified as remark c  on this table  then it becomes impossible for version 1 4x and lower via a FAM connection  a Windows error message  XDCAM devices to record new clips or delete existing appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt    and can
200. n of the software without specific written  permission     CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH  REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE  INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  FITNESS  INNO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE  FOR ANY SPECIAL  INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER  RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE  DATA OR PROFITS  WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION  ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR  PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE     Copyright    2001  Networks Associates Technology  Inc   All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that the following  conditions are met     e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer    e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice  this list of conditions and the following  disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution    e Neither the name of the NAI Labs nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived  from this software without specific prior written permission     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS    AS IS    AND ANY  EXPRESS OR
201. nal signal input to the TC IN connector    1  E E mode  Abbreviation of Electric to Electric mode  The mode in which    input video and audio signals are output after passing only through the  electrical circuits        DISC remaining capacity indicator   This shows the amount of free capacity on the current disc    as follows    SBS  7 segments lit   All capacity is available   As clips are recorded  the number of lit LED segments  decreases       DISC    flashing  The disc is almost full       DISC    and    E    flashing  The disc is full  it must be  replaced         BATT  battery  status display   This shows the amount of charge left in the battery  as   follows    SRR  7 segments lit   Adequately charged  As  the battery discharges  the number of lit LED segments  decreases       BATT    flashing  Almost exhausted  Operation of the  PDW R1 continues        BATT    and    E    flashing  Exhausted  charging  required   Operation of the PDW R1 stops     O Disc loaded mark  This lights while a disc is loaded in the PDW RI1  It flashes  as the disc is inserted  and while it is being ejected      2  Audio and video settings section         AUDIO INPUT CH button     AUDIO INPUT SEL button     VIDEO INPUT SEL button    10          _ VIDEO  INPUT CH   INPUT SEL   INPUT SEL       WARNING O KEY INHI O                                              AUDIO INPUT CH  channel  button  This selects the channel to which the audio input signal  selection applies   Each press of this button 
202. ncues 58  5 2 Creating Clip Lists                eeee 61  5 2 1 Selecting Clips    eeeeeeeeeereeees 61  5 2 2 Reordering Sub Clips    eee 63  5 2 3 Trimming Sub Clips 0    eee 65  5 2 4 Deleting Sub Clips    eee 66  5 2 5 Previewing the Current Clip List     66    5 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc 66  5 3 Managing Clip Lists  CLIP Menu      68  5 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit    Memory eoi oaie 68  5 3 2 Deleting Clip Lists From a Disc      69  5 3 3 Clearing the Current Clip List From the   Unit Memory a eset ees 69  5 3 4 Presetting the Initial Time Code of the   Current Clip Lists  costes esas ievsante vance 69  5 3 5 Sorting Clip Lists 0 0    eeeeeeeteee 70   5 4 Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing   Software ii vicsiisdiiisascevesiseensstncannaciveusvias 71       Chapter 6 File Operations    6 1 OverviewW vvaciiseteicrciesesenciadeeusesnstieiaiense 72  6 1 1 Directory Structure oe 12  6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions               13    Table of Contents    5    6    6 1 3 Assigning User Defined Clip Titles 75  6 1 4 Assigning User Defined Clip and Clip    Eist Naessens 76   6 2 File Access Mode File Operations    78  6 2 1 Making FAM Connections                78  6 2 2 Operating on Files s es 79  6 2 3 Exiting File Operations    79   6 3 FTP File Operations                       000 80  6 3 1 Making FTP Connections                 80  6 3 2 Command List o tstccdedonedh athecseess oe 82   6 4 Recording Continuous Time Code With  FAM and FTP Connectione   
203. ng and playback  It  is also affected by the ambient temperature     H13  SEEK RUNNING mode  resettable    This shows the cumulative seek operation time for the  optical head in units of hours  The count is resettable   This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  the seek motor     8 1 Periodic Maintenance    H14  SPINDLE RUNNING mode  resettable    This shows the cumulative spindle rotation time  in units of  hours  The count is resettable    This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace  the spindle motor     H15  LOADING COUNTER mode  resettable   Display the total number of times disc has been loaded in  the unit  The count is resettable     To display the digital hours meter    Press the MENU button  then turn the jog dial or shuttle  dial to display the required item in the time data display  and in the video panel or on an external monitor                                                                              Shuttle dial  Jog dial  MENU button             To exit from the digital hours meter  Press the MENU button     To jump to H01   Press the MENU button  then the COUNTER SEL button   Every time you press the COUNTER SEL button  menu  item HO1 or BOI is recalled alternately        8 2 Condensation    When this unit is moved from a cold place to a warmer  place  or operated in high humidity  condensation may  form on the optical pickup  This is called condensation   and if the unit is operated in this state  it may make correct  rec
204. nitial  value  The following run modes can be selected      Free Run  Time code advances continually      Rec Run  Time code advances only during recording   Internal Regen mode  which records the output of the  internal time code generator  initialized to time code  following continuously upon the time code of the last  frame of the last clip on the disc    External Regen mode  which records the output of the  internal time code generator  synchronized to an external  time code generator  As the external input  the time code    input to any of the following connectors can be selected       TIME CODE IN connector  LTC    VIDEO IN connector  VITC      1  S400  i LINK  connector  TC or VITC     SDI IN connector  SMPTE RP188 LTC   External Preset mode  which directly records the input of  an external time code generator  As the external input   the time code input to any of the following connectors  can be selected      TIME CODE IN connector  TC       S400  i LINK  connector  TC     SDI IN connector  SMPTE RP188 LTC    As shown in the following table  you can switch between  different time code recording modes by combining switch  settings in the time data settings section with the selection  of a video input signal and settings of extended menu item  629                                                           Time code recording mode Time data settings section switch  VIDEOINPUT   Item Reference  INT EXT   PRESET   F RUN   SELbutton  629  RP188 REGEN R RUN   Internal Preset 
205. nnector   is set to audio channel 2  You can change these settings   with extended menu item 824    ANALOG LINE OUTPUT   SELECT       You can set the output level with the maintenance menu   item    AUDIO CONFIG      Factory default setting   4 dB    Non audio signals are muted    You can also output audio monitor signals by setting   extended menu item 820    AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 CH2   SELECT    to    moni        See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make these settings     For details of the maintenace menu  see 7 4    Maintenance  Menu    on page 112     Analog video signal inputs outputs         VIDEO IN connector    VIDEO OUT 1  OUT 2   SUPER  connectors                  VIDEO IN  analog video input  connector  BNC    type   This inputs a composite video signal        VIDEO OUT 1  OUT 2  SUPER   analog video  output 1  output 2  superimpose   connector  BNC  type    These output composite video signals    The output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  connector   can have time code  menu settings  alarm messages  and   other text information superimposed      4  SDI signal inputs outputs         SDI IN connector      SDI OUT  SUPER   connector                  SDI IN  SDI signal input  connector  BNC type   This inputs an SDI format video audio signal        SDI OUT  SUPER   SDI signal output   superimpose   connector  BNC type    This outputs an SDI format video audio signal    When the unit is shipped from the factory  audio signal
206. not be read     Edit directory                                                    File name Content Operations  Read  Overwrite    Rename Create Delete  Partial read   Partial  overwrite  E E01 SMI    Clip list file Yes Yes   No    Yes 9 Yes         0001 to 0099  E M01 XML    Metadata file generated Yes Yes 5  No No 9  No    automatically when E E01 SMI file  is created      0001 to 0099  Other files Files other than the above   No   No    a  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  the unit can handle files with user  g  When an E E01 SMI file is created  an E MO1 XML file with the same  defined names in the    E E01    part  name in the    E     part is created automatically   b  Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM  Partial overwriting is not h  When an E E01 SMI file is deleted  the E M01 XML file with the same  possible  name in the    E     part is also deleted automatically   c  Possible with firmware version 1 5 and higher   d  Only files which can be overwritten by XDCAM  e  Only when the write inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording  and Note    when extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to    off     Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory   f  With firmware version 1 5 and higher  when the    E E01    part of an  E E01 SMI file name is changed  an E MO1 XML file with the same  name in the    E     part is generated automatically   Sub directory  File name Content Operations  Read  Overwrite    Rename Create Delete  Partial rea
207. oaded   REC INHI   on A recording or E E display command Try the operation again after setting the  was received for a write protected disc    Write Inhibit tab to the recording enabled  position   REC INHI   on A recording or E E display command Try the operation again after setting  was received with extended menu item   extended menu item 310 to    off      310    REC INHIBIT    set to    on      See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations      page 108  about how to make this setting   IMX50 Clip on  limit A recording or E E display command Try the operation again after changing the  IMX40 Clip was received with basic menu item for a   setting of basic menu item 031   IMX30 Clip disc recorded in a format different from  DVCAM Clip the specification of basic menu item 031   See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page  4CHx24 Clip    RECORDING FORMAT     94  about how to change this setting   8CHx16 Clip          8 4 Alarms    127    Bunooys  jqno    pue soueuejuleyy g 4e deyD WMI    Bujooyse qnol  pue soueueyuley g seydeyo WA    128       Message in time  data display    Run Salvage    Display  condition       on  limit    Description    A recording or E E display command  was received for a disc that needs clip  recovery  Salvage      Action    Try the operation again after recovering  clips from the disc  salvage function      See 3 6 7    Handling of Discs When  Recording Does Not End Normally   Salvage Function      page 40         MAX   Files    on  limit  off    The number
208. oaj  s   u  os gJa deyo hl    uo  oajas BUsDg Gg Ja deYyD Wa       5 3 Managing Clip Lists   CLIP Menu     After you create a clip list  you can use the CLIP menu to  save it to disc  load it from disc into the unit memory  and  delete it from the disc    The CLIP menu also allows you to clear and edit the  current clip list     Carry out CLIP menu operations with the unit stopped  If  the message    STOP ONCE  THEN EXECUTE     appears   press the STOP button     To display the CLIP menu       Item Operation                   LOAD Load a clip list from the disc into the current  clip list  see page 68    SAVE Save the current clip list to disc  see page  66    DELETE Delete a clip list from the disc  see page 69    CLEAR Clear the current clip list from the unit  memory  see page 69    TC Preset the first time code in the current clip   PRESET list  see page 69    SORT BY   Sort clip lists by name or date of creation     see page 70                 SUBCLIP button  THUMBNAIL button  SHIFT button                                                                                                                      SET button  MENU button             With the THUMBNAIL button off  hold down the SHIFT  button and press the SUBCLIP button     If the THUMBNAIL button is lit  Press the THUMBNAIL button to turn it off     The CLIP menu appears        CLIP MENU  LOAD  gt   SAVE  DELETE  CLEAR  TC PRESET  SORT BY  gt  name             5 3 Managing Clip Lists  CLIP Menu     To escape from 
209. ode produces a  difference of approximately 86  seconds per day between real time  and time code  which causes  problems when editing programs in  units of seconds using the number of  frames as a reference     Proxy AV data   Low resolution data with a video  bandwidth of 1 5 Mbps and an audio  bandwidth of 64 kbps per channel   This unit records proxy AV data  automatically whenever high   resolution MPEG IMX or DVCAM  data is recorded     Reference video signal   A video signal that contains a sync  signal or sync and burst signals  used  as a reference for synchronization of  video equipment     SDI   Serial Digital Interface  An interface  standardized as SMPTE 259M which  enables the transmission of an  uncompressed digital component  stream     S N   Signal to Noise ratio  The relation of  the strength of the desired signal to  the accompanying electronic  interference  the noise  If S N is high   sounds are reproduced with less noise  and pictures are reproduced clearly  without snow     SNMP   Simple Network Management  Protocol  XDCAM uses this protocol  to monitor equipment operating  status via network connectors     Sub clip   One of the sections which make up a  clip list  A sub clip may be part of a  clip or an entire clip     Thumbnail image   A reduced still picture of video for  display on a GUI screen  XDCAM  creates thumbnail images from proxy  video  and displays them as index  pictures on GUI screens     Time code   A digitally encoded signal which is  r
210. ommand was received with the F RUN    RUN R RUN switch to F RUN   R RUN switch is set to R RUN   See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations      page 108  about how to make this setting   REC PAUSE  on A time code or user bits preset Try the operation again after stopping  command was received with recording   recording   paused   REC mode  on  limit A command to switch video or audio  signals was received during recording   REC mode  on  limit A command to switch audio channels          a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    During recording and editing operations                               Message in time   Display Description Action  data display condition a   Disc Error  on  limit  off Normal recording is not possible Use another disc   because of a disc defect  You can check the state of a disc by  checking playback condition marks  see  page 36    525 60 sig  on  limit A 525 system SDI signal was input with   Input a 625 system SDI signal   this unit in 625 line mode  PAL system   and with    SDI    selected with the VIDEO  INPUT SEL button       625 50 sig  on  limit A 625 system SDI signal was input with   Input a 525 system SDI signal     this unit in 525 U  or 525 J  line mode       NTSC system  and with    SDI    selected Oo  with the VIDEO INPUT SEL button  z  ne   A mode err  on  limit An editing operation was attempted on a   To edit this disc  change the following 2  recorded disc  when one of the following   settings  R  audio settings differed fro
211. on     The same name will now be given to newly recorded  clips     To use clips and clip lists with user defined  names over FAM and FTP connections   Carry out steps 2 to 5 of    To assign clip names on this  unit     and then press the SET button    It is now possible to write  transfer  and rename clips and  clip lists with user defined names over file access mode   FAM  connections  see page 78  and FTP connections   see page 80            Able to use clips with user defined names over FAM and FTP  connections    Sakura SMI       Able to use clip lists with user defined names over FAM and FTP  connections             To check clip names   Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  screen  and select the clip whose name you want to check   The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of  the screen     See    Cuing up a desired clip     page 52  for more  information about the thumbnail screen     e The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed  according to the following order of priority   Title  gt  User defined clip name  gt  Standard format clip  name  Therefore  the display of this item changes as following   depending on whether there is a title     When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit    for clips recorded on this unit  the title is displayed     6 1 Overview 77    suonesadgo aji4 9 Ja deyo MMi    suoeredo   ll4 9 Ja deyo AN    78      The user defined name or standard format name is  displayed for clips without a titl
212. on of clip being played back          a  This appears when a disc is loaded  and the format of a clip recorded on  the disc is different from the format specified by basic menu item 031 or  the setting of the    AUDIO CONFIG         DATA LENGTH    item in the  maintenance menu   b  9PIN  When extended menu item 214 is set to    9PIN     i LINK  When extended menu item 214 is set to    i LINK    and menu item  215 is set to    A V C                   When extended menu item 214 is set to    i LINK    and menu item  215 is set to    FAM     remote control from a device connected to the  p  S400  i LINK  connector is not possible when this combination of  settings is in force     Items displayed on page 2          Item Description   VIDEO INPUT Same as VIN on page 1  AUDIO INPUT n Same as AINn on page 1   n  channel    number 1 to 4        AUDIO OUTPUT             MONITOR L R Audio channels selected with AUDIO  MONITOR SEL button  setting values   tr1 2  tr3 4  tr5 6  tr7 8  MENU     MONITOR  Monitor channel selected with SHIFT     L ST R AUDIO MONITOR SEL button  setting  values  STEREO  R  L    ANALOG 1 2 Audio channels  setting values  tr1 2     tr3 4  tr5 6  tr7 8  assigned to the  AUDIO OUT 1 3  2 4 connectors with  extended menu item 824                2 3 LCD Panel       Item  AES EBU 1 2    Description    Audio channels  setting values  tr1 2   tr3 4  tr5 6  tr7 8  assigned to the  DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  OUT 1 2  connectors with sub item 1 of extended  menu item 827    
213. on whether a file   is specified with  lt path name gt     e File specified  The properties of the specified file   e No specification  The size of the data transferred thus far   unit  bytes                                     File name    File type Input example  STAT Clip C0001 MXF    CODEC type    Frame rate    Number of audio channels    Duration    UMID  e non M F file    File name  ABOR Requests this unit to abort a file ABOR  lt CRLF gt   transfer currently in progress   SYST Displays the system name of this unit    SYST  lt CRLF gt   HELP Displays a list of the commands HELP  lt SP gt   lt command name gt   lt CRLF gt   supported by this unit  or an  explanation of the specified command    The following data is transferred  depending on whether a  command name is specified with  lt command name gt    e Command name specified  Explanation of the specified  command   e No specification  Command list  Input example  HELP RETR  NOOP Does nothing except return a response    NOOP  lt CRLF gt    Used to check whether this unit is  running    PWD Displays the current directory          if the   PWD  lt CRLF gt   directory is the root directory    CWD Changes the current directory  moves   CWD  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt   from the current directory to another  directory   Moves to a directory as follows  depending on whether a  directory is specified with  lt path name gt    e Directory specified  To the specified directory  e No specification  To the root direc
214. ontained on the CD   ROM disc     e Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work  folder to store the material transferred from this unit has  adequate free space  The amount of proxy AV data    transferred is about 1 4 GB per disc  when recording in  the DVCAM format     To transfer files between the computer and this unit  requires this unit   s IP address and other network related  settings to be made     For details of the network related settings  see    To  change network settings     page 115      5 4 Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software    71    uooaj  s   u  os gJa deyo Hl             File Operations   chapter          6 1 Overview    A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used  to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data  files  such as video and audio data files   There are two ways to connect a remote computer   e FAM connection  Connect the   S400  i LINK  connector on this unit to  the i LINK  IEEE1394  connector on the remote  computer  using an i LINK cable  see page 78       FTP connection  Connect the network connectors on this unit and the  remote computer  using a network cable  see page 80         6 1 1 Directory Structure    The following figure shows the directory structure of discs  visible to a remote computer     This structure is not the same as the actual structure  recorded on the disc     6 1 Overview          root a        INDEX XML          ALIAS  XML  gt         DISCMETA XML       ii L mg my       MEDIAPRO XML 
215. or high speed search at  20 times normal  speed     IT friendly system    In the PDW R1  clips are recorded as video and audio data  files   This file based recording system also allows  material to be viewed directly on a computer linked to the  unit via an i LINK  file access mode  called FAM below   connection   in the same way that a computer reads data  files on an external drive  The interfaces include the  BS400 G LINK  connector  supporting AV C  Audio   Video Control  and i LINK  FAM  protocols  and  5   network  connector  The    network  connector  supports MXF  Material eXchange Format  file transfer  capability to exchange contents with other equipment  supporting MXF     1 1 Features 9    MAIAIOAQ   Ja deyD HA    10    1  A clip is created every time recording is stopped      Video and audio data are always recorded in empty sections of the disc   Recording begins instantly  even after playback  without overwriting  existing video on the disc     Recording is done in clip units  which makes it simple to delete a clip  immediately after shooting if it is judged to be unneeded      During playback  thumbnail lists make it easy to identify clips  The  random access nature of the media allows the NEXT and PREV buttons  to jump instantly to clip start frames  making it easy to check the video  and audio in the clips     i  LINK  FAM  or network connections make it possible to transfer clip  files at high speed between this unit and remote computers     Flexible metad
216. or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  interfaces  the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical  distribution limitation excluding those countries  so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus  excluded  In such case  this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License     The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from  time to time  Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version  but may differ in detail to address new  problems or concerns     Each version is given a distinguishing version number  If the Library specifies a version number of this License which  applies to it and    any later version     you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version  or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation  If the Library does not specify a license version  number  you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation     If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible  with these  write to the author to ask for permission  For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software  Foundation  write to the Free Software Foundation  we sometimes make exceptions for this  Our decision will be  gu
217. ording and playback impossible    Note the following points  to avoid problems with   condensation    e When moving the unit under conditions in which  condensation is likely  first insert the disc  and close the  lid on the disc slot    e If when you move the on standby switch to the I position  the indication    HUMID    appears in the status display   do not insert a disc until the indication disappears        8 3 Error Messages    Error codes appear in the time data display when an error   usually a hardware problem  occurs  Error codes and error  messages appear in the video panel  and on an external  monitor to which the output of the VIDEO OUT 2   SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER  connector is input    When an error message appears  follow the instructions in  the error message to resolve the problem           Display in video panel and on external monitor    Error code              ERROR    AN ERROR HAS BEEN  DETECTED  INFORM SERVICE  OF FOLLOWING CODE     PRESS EJECT KEY  TO EJECT DISC              Display in time data display    Error code                      8 2 Condensation   8 3 Error Messages    121    Bunooysejqno4  pue soueuejuleyy g 4a deyD HHMI    Buyooyse qnoi  pue soueueluley g seydeyo WA       8 4 Alarms    An alarm  warning message  appears in the time data  display when an operation is attempted which is  inappropriate for the settings on this unit or the state of the  disc  The video panel and an external monitor to which the  output of the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  S
218. ough capacity in the General  directory when an attempt was made to  record  display an E E picture  record an  essence mark  or add a quick scene  selection sub clip    Disc Full  on  limit  off An attempt was made to record or          8 4 Alarms    125    Bunooys  jqno    pue soueuejuleyy g 4a deyD HHMI    Bujooyse qnoi  pue soueueyuley g seydeyo WA                                                       Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition      MAX  SB CLP on  limit  off An attempt was made to add a sub clip   These operations are not possible   when the number of registered sub clips  had already reached the upper limit   300  of the specifications of this unit    CL OVER DUR fon  limit  off An attempt was made to add a sub clip  when the total duration of sub clips in the  clip list had already reached the upper  limit  24 hours  of the specifications of  this unit    Run Salvage on  limit  off An attempt was made to record  display   Try the operation again after executing the  an E E picture  record an essence mark    salvage function   or add a quick scene selection sub clip  on a disc which requires clip recovery For details  see 3 6 7    Handling of Discs   salvage   When Recording Does Not End Normally    Salvage Function      page 40     CNT mode  on A time code or user bits preset operation   Try the operation again after selecting    TC     was attempted with    COUNTER    or    UB    with the COUNTER SEL button   selected by the 
219. ous section     To  record time code after setting an initial value        2 With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  dial in the counterclockwise direction  Stop rotating  when    CLOCK    appears in the time data display and  the video panel     3 Press the SET button     To set user bits   You can record up to eight hexadecimal digits of  information  date  time  clip name  etc   in the time code  track    Proceed as follows        Time data display                                                                              EO    Ma   menu st    OO ag                      PLAY NEXT STOP RI                      f  gt     gt                                                                    1 Watching the indicators above the time data display   press the COUNTER SEL button to select UB     2 Carry out steps 2 to 6 of the section    To set an initial    value     page 44      Settings are made in hexadecimal  0  1  2     8  9  A   B     E  F      4 1 Recording    45    yoeghe d Bulpiovey p 10 deyo                          yoeghe d Buipiooey y Ja deyD                          46    To record time code that follows  sequentially upon the last recorded time  code    You can record time code so that it is continuous from one  clip to the next on the disc    Set the INT EXT RP188 switch to INT and the PRESET   REGEN switch to REGEN beforehand  When this setting  is in force  the unit reads the time code of the last frame of  the last recorded clip on the disc before st
220. owing state     Recording  playback  search and other disc  operations  see page 16   Stopped   THUMBNAIL button  see page 13   Off   Disc access by DELETE  FORMAT  and so on in  the System menu  see page 117   Stopped  Unsaved current clip list  Save or clear   Extended menu item 258    LIVE LOGGING     off    Login is not possible unless a disc is loaded and the  unit is in the state described above     2 Start the command prompt     3 Enter    ftp  lt SP gt   lt IP address gt      and press the Enter  key    lt SP gt  refers to a space      For example  if the IP address of this unit is set to     192 168 001 010     enter    ftp 192 168 1 10        Refer to the Windows help for more information about  the FTP command     If the connection succeeds  you are prompted to enter  a user name     4 Enter the user name    admin    and press the Enter key     When the user name is verified  you are prompted to  enter a password     5 Enter the password and press the Enter key     The password is set to    pdw rl    when the unit is  shipped from the factory   The login is complete when the password is verified     See 6 3 2    Command List     page 82  for the FTP  protocol commands supported by this unit     If the connection times out   This unit terminates FTP connections if no command  is received within 90 seconds of the last command  If  this occurs  log out  see the next section  and repeat  steps 2 to 4     If you power this unit off during an FTP connection   the data tr
221. put after being converted into  DVCAM format    The nonlinear editing system to be used being connected  to this unit requires editing software  not supplied   supporting DVCAM format     e Make the following settings before transferring video   audio signals  A V C data  from this unit to a nonlinear  editing system    Audio mode selection   Use extended menu item 831    DV OUT AUDIO  MODE     to select either of the following    4ch  12 bit 32 kHz 4ch   2ch  16 bit 48 kHz 2ch  Factory default setting   Audio output channel selection   Select the audio output channels with extended menu  item 828    SDI DV AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT        For information about how to make extended menu item  settings  see 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations    on  page 108            i LINK cable  not supplied                                                                                S400  i LINK     To i LINK IEEE1394   connector    Laptop computer   With editing software supporting  DVCAM format installed     Make sure extended menu item 215    i LINK MODE    is set to     AVIC                 For the method of transferring video audio signals  AV C  data  to a nonlinear editing system  refer to the manual  provided with the editing software to be used        3 1 4 Connections for Recording in  Parallel With a Camcorder    You can start and stop recording on this unit at the same   time that recording starts and stops on a camcorder  This  allows you to make a backup recording of the video and
222. put signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector     Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor        029 STORED OWNERSHIP    Specify whether to enable changing UMID ownership information settings   COUNTRY  ORGANIZATION and USER     off  Do not enable    on  Enable     See 7 3 3    Using UMID Data     page 109  for more information about UMID        031 RECORDING FORMAT    Select the recording format    IMX50  IMX 50Mbps   MPEG IMX 50 Mbps  IMX40  IMX 40Mbps   MPEG IMX 40 Mbps  IMX30  IMX 30Mbps   MPEG IMX 30 Mbps  DVCAM  DVCAM          032 LCD MONITOR MODE    Set the aspect ratio for the video panel    auto  the aspect ratio of the display screen automatically adjusts to the  aspect ratio of the input material    16 9  set the aspect ratio to 16 9    4 3  set the aspect ratio to 4 3           034 MENU STATUS DISPLAY ON  VIDEO MONITOR          Specify whether to display the setup menu status at the left edge of the   status display line when basic menu item 005    DISPLAY INFORMATION   SELECT    is set to    T amp sta       dis  disable   Do not display    ena  enable   Display   The display is visible only when no disc is loaded   and during insertion and ejection of a disc         7 2 Basic Setup Menu          Item number  035    Item name  CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT       Settings    Specify whether or not to allow user definition of the titles assigned to clips     off  Do not allo
223. quired position while viewing the monitor        003    CHARACTER V POSITION    Adjust the vertical screen position  as a hexadecimal value  of the text   information displayed on the monitor  a    00    2E    38  525 U  525 J  line modes  00    37    43  625 line mode    The hexadecimal value 00 is for the top of the screen  Increasing the  value lowers the position of the characters     a  Video panel and external monitor  when the input signals to the monitor are the  video signals output from the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector     Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor        005          DISPLAY INFORMATION  SELECT       Determine the kind of text information to be displayed on the monitor  a    off  display off   Do not output text information    T amp sta  time data  amp  status    Time data and the units status    T amp UB  time data  amp  UB   Time data and user bit data   When UB  user bit  data  is selected with the COUNTER SEL button  the user bit data and  time data arranged in that order are displayed     T amp CNT  time data  amp  CNT   Time data and counter count   When  COUNTER is selected with the COUNTER SEL button  the counter  count and time data arranged in that order are displayed     T amp T  time data  amp  time data   Time data and time code  TC or VITC     T amp clp  time data  amp  clip name   Time code and clip name   time  time data only   Time data only        a  Video panel and external mon
224. r  or your school  if any  to sign a    copyright disclaimer     for the program  if necessary  Here is a sample  alter the names     Yoyodyne  Inc   hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program       Gnomovision     which makes passes at compilers   written by James Hacker       1 April 1989  Ty Coon  President of Vice    This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs  If your program is a  subroutine library  you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library  If this is  what you want to do  use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License     GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE    Version 2 1  February 1999   Copyright    1991  1999 Free Software Foundation  Inc    59 Temple Place  Suite 330  Boston  MA 02111 1307 USA   Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document  but changing it is not allowed      This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL  It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License   version 2  hence the version number 2 1      Preamble   The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it  By contrast  the GNU  General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the  software is free for all its users     This license  the Lesser General Public License  applies to some specially des
225. r each of the ALL CH 1  CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs   on the control panel is effective to control the audio recording level and   playback level on each channel or the ALL CH 1 adjustment knob alone   functions as a master control to control the audio level on all channels   together    each  Each of the ALL CH 1  CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs is effective  to control each channel    all  The ALL CH 1 adjustment knob alone functions as a master control   When    all    is selected  the ALL indicator to the right of the ALL CH 1  adjustment knob lights up        142    REPEAT MODE    Put the unit into repeat playback mode  or exit from repeat playback  mode    off  Exits from repeat playback mode    play  Puts the unit into repeat playback mode        143    INDEX PICTURE POSITION    Select the frame of the clip to use as the thumbnail image  index picture   when recording    Osec to 10sec  Can be set in the range from 0 seconds  first frame of the  clip  to10 seconds  in units of 1 second        145    MODE KEY ENABLE DURING  RECORDING    Specify whether only the STOP button stops recording    ena  all enable   Recording stops when the EJECT button is pressed 2   and when the PLAY  STOP  SHUTTLE  and JOG buttons are  pressed  b    stop  Recording stops only when the STOP button is pressed     a  The disc is ejected after recording stops   b  The unit enters stop mode when the PLAY button is pressed  and enters still  image mode  jog shuttle mode  when the SHUTTLE or JOG bu
226. r to this License  so that they refer to the ordinary GNU  General Public License  version 2  instead of to this License   If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU  General Public License has appeared  then you can specify that version instead if you wish   Do not make any other  change in these notices     Once this change is made in a given copy  it is irreversible for that copy  so the ordinary GNU General Public License  applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy     This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library     You may copy and distribute the Library  or a portion or derivative of it  under Section 2  in object code or executable  form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding  machine readable source code  which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium  customarily used for software interchange     If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place  then offering equivalent  access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code  even though  third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code     A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library  but is designed to work with the Library by being  compiled or linked with it  is ca
227. rations    To play clips in the order they are recorded  press this  button again  turning it off    The CLIP menu  see page 68  appears in the time data  display  in the video panel  and on an external monitor  when you press this button with the SHIFT button held  down  Press the MENU button to escape from the CLIP  menu     If no clip list is registered  this button does not light when  pressed  The operation is invalid        THUMBNAIL button    To carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list  press  this button turning it on  Thumbnail images representing    2 2 Control Panel    13    Sed JO Suoljouny pue sawe zsejdeyo N    Sued JO suoyoUNY pue sawe Zz Ja deyo WA    14    each clip or sub clip appear  Press once more to turn the  button off  and return to a whole screen display    To display the thumbnails of essence mark frames  frames  with an essence mark attached   hold down the SHIFT  button  and press this button  The essence mark selection  menu appears  Select the desired type of essence mark  and  the corresponding essence mark frames appear in  thumbnails  Press once more  turning the button off  to  return to a whole screen display        SHIFT button  Use to switch the functions of various buttons        MENU button   Use for setup menu and system menu operations  Pressing  this button displays the setting of a setup menu item in the  time data display  The same information is also  superimposed on the displays of the video panel and a  monitor connecte
228. re A    sex pueddy AM    144    12     13     14     to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations  then as a  consequence you may not distribute the Library at all  For example  if a patent license would not permit royalty free  redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you  then the only way you  could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library     If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance  the balance of the  section is intended to apply  and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances     It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  validity of any such claims  this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  system which is implemented by public license practices  Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system  it is up to the  author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  impose that choice     This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License     If the distribution and 
229. s     power the unit off and then on again with the on   standby switch     7 4 Maintenance Menu    Setting the communications speed   Set the communications speed  LINK SPEED  and  communications method  DUPLEX  to match the network  environment     For details of the operation  see    Basic maintenance menu  operations     page 114         7 5 System Menu       7 5 1 Items in the System Menu    The following tables show the items in the system menu   Item names are the names which appear in the video panel     VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER  connector is  input     and on an external monitor to which the output of the    DISC MENU  items relating to disc                                              Item Setting   STATUS Display disc status or clip status    Sub item  Although the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software can write TITLE1 and TITLE2  only TITLE1 is  displayed here    1   DISC Display disc status    2   CLIP Display clip status    DELETE Delete clips on the disc    Sub item   1   LAST CLIP Delete the last clip    2   ALL CLIP Delete all the clips   Locked files and files in the General directory cannot be deleted     FORMAT Select the disc format  and carry out formatting    Sub item   1   QUICK FORMAT Quick format  Deletes all data on the disc  including the contents of the General directory         DATE TIME PRESET  items relating to date and time setting       Item  YEAR       MONTH       DAY       TIME       TIME ZONE          Setting  Set the year  month  day  t
230. selects the next audio input  channel  in the following order    CH1     gt  CH2     CH3     CH4  The selected channel appears in the time data display and  video panel   You can use the AUDIO INPUT SEL button to select the  audio input signal for the selected channel     When audio is in eight channel mode  On channels 5 to 8  you can input only the audio signals  embedded in an SDI signal        AUDIO INPUT SEL  selection  button   This selects the input signal to the channel selected with   the AUDIO INPUT CH button described above    Each press of this button selects the next audio input   signal  and the audio input indications in the time data   display and video panel change to reflect this    ANALOG  Analog audio signal input to the AUDIO IN  connector   SDI  SDI audio signal input to the SDI IN connector   AES EBU  AES EBU format digital audio signal input to  the DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU  IN connector   SG  Audio test signal generated by the internal signal  generator       VIDEO INPUT SEL  selection  button   Pressing this button cycles through the following   selections of the video input signal    e SDI video signal input to the SDI IN connector   e Composite video signal input to the VIDEO IN  connector   e Test video signal from the internal signal generator   e i  LINK compliant DVCAM format digital signal   i LINK input comprising both video and audio signals   input to the   S400  i LINK  connector    Signals are selected in the following order  The video inpu
231. space  or period      the clip name is the title string minus the  first letter    e An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use  Unicode characters other than ASCII characters   Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF   8                           f    TITLE00001    When the    AUTO NAMING    sub item of basic menu item    036 is set to    C            rmen                     f    When the    AUTO NAMING     sub item of basic menu item  036 is set to    title       m             1 Before you start  set the    TITLE    sub item of basic  menu item 035    CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT    to     enable     and set a title  see the previous section      2 Press the MENU button     3 Rotate the jog dial or the shuttle dial to display menu  item 036     4 With the STOP button held down  rotate the jog dial or  the shuttle dial to move the         to the left of the item  names to    NAMING FORM        The         indicates the selected item        ITEM 036    FILE NAMING      NAMING FORM    AUTO NAMING  END        CkxkkKx      Ck             5 With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  dial or the shuttle dial to select    free        You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user   defined names     6 With the STOP button held down  rotate the jog dial or  the shuttle dial to move the         to the left of    AUTO  NAMING        T With the SHUTTLE button held down  rotate the jog  dial or the shuttle dial to select    title        8 Press the SET butt
232. st the audio recording levels  page 43         AUDIO MONITOR SEL button  page 15   Select the audio channels to monitor        AC power switch  rear panel   page 11    Set to the I  on  position    If you are using DC power or a battery pack  connect the  DC power or mount the battery pack on the battery pack  shoe before recording       VIDEO INPUT SEL button  page 19   Select the input video signal        COUNTER SEL button  page 13    Select the data  elapsed recording time  time code value or  user bit data  to show in the time data display  When  displaying the time code value  select TC or VITC with  extended menu item 629    TC SELECT        Setting the recording format    Before recording  it is necessary to set the recording format  for each of video and audio     It is not possible to combine different recording formats on  a single disc  When the format of previously recorded  sections on the disc does not match the current recording  format of this unit  the disc is record inhibited and the REC  INHI lights        To set the video recording format    Use basic menu item 031    RECORDING FORMAT    to  select the video recording format from MPEG IMX 50  Mbps  MPEG IMX 40 Mbps  MPEG IMX 30 Mbps  and  DVCAM    The factory default setting is IMX50     For details of the basic menu operations  see 7 2 2    Basic  Menu Operations    on page 94     To set the audio recording format    When using the MPEG IMX 50Mbps 40Mbps 30Mbps  for video  Use the maintenance menu item  
233. t    Disc Damage on  limit  off An attempt was made to record  display   This disc cannot be recorded  Exchange  an E E picture  record an essence mark    the disc   or add a quick scene selection sub clip  when there was no free sparing area    Non AV Full on  limit  off An attempt was made to record  display   Insert a different disc with enough free  an E E picture  record an essence mark    capacity   or add a quick scene selection sub clip  when there was no free Non Real Time  space    Index File  on  limit  off An attempt was made to record to a disc   Exchange the disc for one that contains an  containing an unsupported index file  index file supported by this unit    Alternatively  format the disc  see page  39     File System on  limit  off An attempt was made to record to a disc   It may be possible to play back the disc  but   with an unsupported file system  recording is not possible  Exchange the  7 mae F disc for one formatted in a file system  File System on  limit  off An attempt was made to record to a disc supported by this unit  Alternatively  format    the disc  see page 39            a  With respect to setting of basic menu item 016    During reception of commands from an external device connected to the REMOTE connector                            Message in time   Display Description Action  data display condition     No Disc  on A recording  playback  search  or other   Try the operation again after loading a disc   command was received with no disc  l
234. t    SB CLP mode on  limit The SHIFT button and the THUMBNAIL   Press the SUBCLIP button  turning it off   button were pressed together with the and try the operation again    SUBCLIP button lit    SUB CLIP NG on  limit The SHIFT and SET buttons were Set the IN and OUT points correctly and try  pressed together when IN and OUT the operation again   points were not set correctly  the OUT  point was set before the IN point  etc      No List  on  limit  off An attempt was made to delete a clip list   This operation is not possible           with no clip lists saved on the disc           8 4 Alarms                                              when its file system was set to inhibit  recording        Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition     during playback of a clip list  playback    STOP ONCE  on  limit  off An attempt was made to display the  CLIP menu during playback    No EM Space on  limit  off Recording of an essence mark failed Use the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software to  because the number of essence marks   delete unneeded essence marks   recorded on the disc reached the upper  limit of the specifications of this unit    EM Full  on  limit  off An attempt was made to add an essence  mark with the number of recorded  essence marks at the upper limit of the  specifications of this unit    Formatting  on  limit  off An attempt was made to display the Wait until the end of the auto format    DISC MENU page in the system menu  during an auto forma
235. t  indication in the video panel changes to reflect this   SDI     COMPOSITE     SG     i LINK    Input signals  AV C  from the  8400  i LINK  connector  cannot be recorded when the basic menu item 031     RECORDING FORMAT    is set to    IMX 50        IMX40      or    IMX 30     E E video display and audio output are also  not possible    Select a signal other than    i LINK    to record IMX format  video signals  When i LINK input signals are selected  set  basic menu item 031   RECORDING FORMAT    to     DVCAM        See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page 94  for more  information about how to make basic menu settings     Display settings section         STATUS button     CHARACTER switch     LIGHT switch     MONITOR switch          OL  STATUS   CHARACTER LIGHT  TJ   S     RECINHIO  ofFF ON    MONITOR      a     OFF ON                oF L                 STATUS button  Displays information about the current settings of this unit  in the video panel   The displayed information changes in the following order  with each press of the button    Page 1     Page 2     Display off    Items displayed on page 1                            Item Description   525  625 Line mode selected with basic menu  item 013   IMX50  IMX40  Video recording format selected with   IMX30  DVCAM basic menu item 031   8ch  4ch Number of audio recording channels   When the format is IMX50 40 30  this  is the number of channels specified by  maintenance menu item    AUDIO  CONFIG          DATA LENGTH
236. t bring the other work under the scope of this  License     You may copy and distribute the Program  or a work based on it  under Section 2  in object code or executable form  under the terms of Sections   and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    a  Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code  which must be distributed under the  terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange  or     b  Accompany it with a written offer  valid for at least three years  to give any third party  for a charge no more than  your cost of physically performing source distribution  a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding  source code  to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software  interchange  or     c  Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code   This  alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or  executable form with such an offer  in accord with Subsection b above      The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it  For an executable  work  complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains  plus any associated interface  definition files  plus the scripts used to control compilation and
237. t clip list  see page 60   For the clip list loading operation  see 5 3 1    Loading  a Clip List From Disc Into Unit Memory     page 68      2 Press the SUBCLIP button  turning it on     3 Press the PLAY button     Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current  clip list     Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and  their arrangement on the disc  playback may freeze  momentarily between sub clips     Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails    With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list   proceed as follows      T Press the SUBCLIP button and the THUMBNAIL  button  turning them on     Thumbnails of the first frames in the sub clips appear     4 2 Playback       Sixth frame is selected    Name of current clip list a  from a total of 34 sub clips    Total duration of  sub clips in clip list       Currently  selected sub clip    Recording date and  time of selected sub clip    Duration of selected sub clip  or time code of first frame    a  When a title has been assigned to a clip list  the title is  enclosed in double quotation marks  for example    SAKURA                 To switch between duration and time code display  in the thumbnail display   Press the COUNTER SEL button  Each press of the  button toggles between duration display and time code  display     To escape from the thumbnail display to the full   screen display  Press the THUMBNAIL button  turning it off     2 Use the arrow buttons or the jog dial to select the sub  clip you wan
238. t their preset values    PRESET  Do not adjust the audio levels    PB  Adjust the playback audio levels  The input audio  levels are fixed at their preset values        ALL CH 1  CH 2 to CH 4  audio level  adjustment  knobs   Depending on the setting of the VARIABLE switch  these   adjust the input audio or playback audio levels of channels   1 to4    By the setting of extended menu item 131    AUDIO   VOLUME     you can enable the ALL CH 1 knob to   simultaneously adjust all eight channels  When this   simultaneous adjustment is enabled the ALL indicator   lights        AUDIO METER SEL  selection  button   When using MPEG IMX format in eight channel mode   select whether the audio level meters should display  channels 1 to 4 or channels 5 to 8    Pressing this button toggles the selection  and the audio  level meter channel display also changes    The factory default is for channels 1 to 4 to be selected        AUDIO MONITOR SEL  selection  button   This button selects two channels from among the up to   eight audio signal channels  You can monitor the audio of   the selected channels  the left and right channels in the  case of stereo output  with the PHONES jack on the front  panel and the built in speaker    Pressing this button cycles through the following five   channel combinations    e tr1 2  Channels 1  left  and 2  right    e tr3 4  Channels 3  left  and 4  right    e tr5 6  Channels 5  left  and 6  right    e tr7 8  Channels 7  left  and 8  right    e MENU  Audio c
239. t to cue up     You can select sub clips with the following operations    Press the PREV or NEXT button  Move to the  previous or next sub clip    Press the PREV or NEXT button with the SHIFT  button held down  Move to the first or last sub  clip    Press the 4 or Y button with the SHIFT button held  down  Switch to the previous or next page     3 Tocue up the selected sub clip  press the SET button   To start playback from the selected sub clip  press the  PLAY button        4 2 5 Repeat Playback    You can perform repeat playback for normal and clip list  playback     To perform repeat playback  set extended menu item 142       REPEAT MODE    to    play     and then proceed as follows     1 Insert a disc     To perform repeat playback for normal playback   proceed to step 3     2 To perform repeat playback for clip list playback   press the SUBCLIP button     3 Press the PLAY button     Playback starts from the saved playback position    Normal playback  When playback of the last clip  finishes  it resumes from the start of the disc   repeatedly playing from the first through the last  clip on the disc    Clip list playback  When playback of the last sub clip  finishes  it resumes from the start of the clip list   repeatedly playing from the first through the last  sub clip in the clip list     If extended menu item 142    REPEAT MODE     is set  to    play     repeat playback starts from the first clip  automatically whenever you power the unit on with a  disc loaded  Clip
240. t turn off the AC  power switch  disconnect the power cord  or remove the  battery  This could lead to a loss of data from the disc        Video panel  color    In recording  playback and editing operations  this shows  recording and playback video  thumbnails  and other  images  A status screen appears here when you press the  STATUS button  see page 19         WARNING indicator   This lights when condensation within the PDW R1  a laser  diode fault  or another hardware error is detected  It goes  off when the error state is cleared  When this indicator is  lit  the time data display and video panel show an error  message     For details  see 8 3    Error Messages     page 121  and 8   4    Alarms     page 122         KEY INHI  key inhibit  indicator   This lights when the KEY INHI switch is set to on  with  either    MON  INPUT SEL    or    CONTROL PANEL    set  to    dis    in extended menu item 118    KEY INHIBIT        2 3 LCD Panel    17    Sed JO suonouny pue sewen zsejdeyo NM    Sped Jo suoyouny pue sewen z Ja deyo HAI    18       REC INHI  recording inhibit  indicator   This lights in the following cases    When a disc with recording inhibited is loaded    When extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to     on       The format of the recorded part of the disc does not  match the settings of the PDW R1  number of recorded  channels  TV system  525 625 selection   and recording  format  DVCAM IMX50 IMX40 IMX30 selection        1  Status display         Audio le
241. tch the real time clock   off  Do not adjust the internal clock to match the real time clock   on  Adjust the internal clock to match the real time clock    651 UMID SDI OUTPUT Select whether to output UMID in the VANC of the SDI output   off  Do not output   on  Output    See 7 3 3    Using UMID Data     page 109  for more information about  UMID        102    7 3 Extended Menu          Menu items in the 600s  relating to the time code  metadata  and UMID       Item number  652    Item name  UMID SDI VANC LINE    Settings    Select the line in which UMID is output when menu item 651 is set to      on       12 H  12 line   13 H  13 line   15 H  15 line   16 H  16 line   17 H  17  line   18 H  18 line   19 H  19 line   525 U  525 J  line modes    9 H  9 line   10 H  10 line   12 H  12 line   13 H  13 line   14 H  14 line    15 H  15 line   16 H  16 line   17 H  17 line   18 H  18 line   625  line mode     See 7 3 3    Using UMID Data     page 109  for more information about  UMID                             657 ESSENCE MARK SDI OUTPUT Select whether to output essence marks in the SDI output VANC   off  Do not output   on  Output   660 ESSENCE MARK SDI VANC LINE   When item 657 is set to    on     select the line to which to output essence  marks   12 H  12 line   13 H  13 line   15 H  15 line   16 H  16 line   17 H  17  line   18 H  18 line   19 H  19 line   525 U  525 J  line modes   9H  9 line   10 H  10 line   12 H  12 line   13 H  13 line   14 H  14 line    15 H  15 line  
242. tended menu item 827    AES EBU AUDIO  OUTPUT SELECT        To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as  non audio signals  set the maintenance menu item     AUDIO CONFIG       NON AUDIO INPUT     recording   and extended menu item 823    NON AUDIO FLAG PB      playback      See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     page 108  for  more information about how to make extended menu  settings    See 7 4 2    Maintenance Menu Operations     page 114   for more information about how to make maintenance  menu settings      2  Analog audio signal inputs outputs         AUDIO IN 1 3  2 4 connectors       AUDIO IN       TE EET E  AUDIO OUT                B AUDIO OUT 1 3  2 4 connectors               AUDIO IN  analog audio signal input  1 3  2 4  connectors  XLR 3 pin  female    These input analog audio signals    With the AUDIO INPUT SEL button  see page 19   you   can select whether the signal input to connector 1 3 is   assigned to audio channel lor 3  and whether the signal   input to connector 2 4 is assigned to audio channel 2 or 4    You can set the reference input level with the maintenance   menu item    AUDIO CONFIG      Factory default setting     4 dB     For details of the maintenace menu  see 7 4    Maintenance  Menu    on page 112        AUDIO OUT  analog audio signal output  1 3  2 4  connectors  XLR 3 pin  male    These output analog audio signals    When the unit is shipped from the factory  the 1 3   connector is set to audio channel 1  and the 2 4 co
243. terial       Material source  D detecting    Metadata pack that identifies  the source of material unit by  defining the when  where  and who of the material unit  with which it is associated        Using the Extended UMID   You have to enter a country code  organization code and  user code  Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166  table  and set the organization code and user code  independently     For details  see    About UMID ownership information      page 111      Functions of UMID data   The UMID data enables the followings    e Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audio visual  material  The unique ID is used to detect the material  source and to link it with the original source material    e Distinguishing between original material and copied  material  00 is added to the Instance Number for original  material     7 3 Extended Menu    e Recording based on the UTC  The UTC is used when  recording the UMID  This enables uniform control of  source material recorded all over the world based on the  universal time code    e Calculating the date difference among source materials   The source material is recorded based on the MJD   Modified Julian Date   which enables easy calculation  of date difference among source materials     Setting UMID ownership information  Proceed as follows     1 Set extended menu item 029    STORED  OWNERSHIP    to    on        See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page 94  for  more information about how to make this setting      
244. the  gt  OUT button held down  press  the NEXT button     You can escape from the sub clip trim screen to full   screen display without executing a trim if you press the  THUMBNAIL button     5 Once you have set the new In point or Out point  hold    down the SHIFT button and press the SET button     The trim is executed  and you return to the sub clip  thumbnail display     x    0 03 00 00       To cancel the trim   Reset the In or Out point to the value it had before you  entered the sub clip trim screen  and then hold down  the SHIFT button and press the SET button     6 Save the current clip list to disc     See 5 2 6    Saving the Current Clip List to Disc     page  66      5 2 Creating Clip Lists    65    uooaj  s   u  os gJa deyo hl    udI Da ag BUsDg Gg Ja deYyD Wa    66       5 2 4 Deleting Sub Clips       SET button  RESET button             or ae bom wow   CLIP iL         6  0 Of                                    gt  OUT button  4   buttons   lt  IN button             1 Carry out steps 1 to 4 of 5 2 2    Reordering Sub Clips     to select a sub clip and display the sub clip operation  menu     2 Use the     or   button to select DELETE  and then  press the SET button     The sub clip deletion screen appears     p  pi M S  z      f      27 AUG 11 00 DUR 00 03 00 00    To cancel the deletion and return to the previous   screen   Do one of the following   e Use the  lt  or  gt  button to select CANCEL  and then  press the SET button    e Press the RESET button     Th
245. the CLIP menu   Press the MENU button           5 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc  Into Unit Memory    The clip list loaded with this procedure becomes the  current clip list     1 Display the CLIP menu   See    To display the CLIP menu     page 68      2 Use the 4 button to move the cursor to LOAD  and  then press the  gt  button     A list of clip lists appears   The date of creation or the title is displayed for each  clip list        CLIP MENU  LOAD  E0001 04 08 08 21 57  E0002 04 08 24 11 15  E0003 04 08 25 15 30    E0004 NEW FILE  gt   E0005 NEW FILE  E0006 NEW FILE  E0007 NEW FILE  E0008 NEW FILE  E0009 NEW FILE  TITLE   SHIFT SET KEY          To switch between display of dates of creation   titles  and clip list names   With the SHIFT button held down  press the SET  button    With each press  the display changes as follows   Dates of creation  gt  titles  gt  clip list names  gt  dates of  creation       3 Use the or button or the jog dial to select the  desired clip list  and then press the  gt  button    A confirmation message like the one shown below  appears        LOAD CLIP LIST    LOAD E0002 OK      LOAD    TO MENU      SET KEY  MENU_KEY             4 Press the SET button     The selected clip list is loaded into the unit memory as  the current clip list     If an unsaved current clip list exists in the unit  memory   A warning message like the following appears       CLIP LIST IS NOT SAVED  OVERWRITE CLIP  LIST       Press the SET button to overwrite the uns
246. the NTSC  inserted when this unit is in 525 U  or system   525 J  line mode  NTSC system    IMX50 Clip on  limit The recording format of the loaded disc   To record on the disc  change the setting of  IMX40 Clip differs from the format specified with basic menu item 031   IMX30 Clip basic menu item 031    RECORDING  DVCAM Clip FORMAT     See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page       94  about how to change this setting           8 4 Alarms    123    Bunooys  jqno    pue soueuejuleyy g 4e deyD WMI    Bujooyse qnoi  pue soueueyuley g seydeyo WA    124                      Message in time   Display Description Action  data display condition     4CHx24 Clip on  limit The number of channels and quantizing   To record on the disc  change the setting of  8CHx16 Clip bits of the loaded disc differ from the maintenance menu item    AUDIO CONFIG     specifications of maintenance menu item        DATA LENGTH         AUDIO CONFIG          DATA LENGTH      See 7 4 2    Maintenance Menu Operations      page 114  about how to change this  setting   No Support  on  limit  off A disc recorded in an unsupported Use a disc recorded in the MPEG IMX or  recording format was inserted  DVCAM format   ILL  Index  on  limit  off An index file error was detected  Format the disc   For details  see 3 6 5    Formatting a Disc      page 39    FORMAT NG  on  limit  off Automatic format failed  Use another disc   DI read err on  limit  off A disc read error occurred  Try ejecting the disc and inserting
247. the display switches to the status of the new    clip         CLIP STATUS    CLIP NO   001 010  NAME   coo01  TITLE   no name   RECORD DEVICE  PDW R1  SERIAL  10001  DATE   01 01 06  TIME   19 54 38    TO MENU   MENU KEY          7 5 System Menu    To return to the previous menu page  Press the MENU button     To exit the menu system  Press the MENU button twice     To delete clips    Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the  disc is set to the recording disabled position  or when  extended menu item 310    REC INHIBIT    is set to    on      Locked clips  see page 55  are not deleted     Proceed as follows     1    2    Carry out steps 1 and 2 in the previous section    To  display disc status and clip status        Press the 4 button or Y button to select    DELETE      then press the  gt  button     The    DELETE    menu item appears   Delete the last clip or all clips     To delete the last clip  Press the 4 button or   button to select    LAST CLIP      then press the  gt  button     The name of the clip to be deleted appears   To cancel the deletion and return to the previous page   press the MENU button     To delete all clips  Press the 4 button or     button to select    ALL CLIP      then press the  gt  button     The message    ALL DELETE OK     appears    To cancel the deletion and return to the previous page   press the RESET button    To cancel the deletion and exit the menu system  press  the MENU button     Press the SET button     The last cl
248. this for playback in shuttle mode  Turn clockwise for  forward direction playback  and counterclockwise for  reverse direction playback  In shuttle mode  the playback  speed varies in the range  20 times normal speed  using  MPEG IMX DVCAM   according to the angular position  of the shuttle dial  The shuttle dial has a detent at the center  position  for still image playback    Normally  you press the SHUTTLE button before turning  the shuttle dial  but it is also possible to make a setting to  enable shuttle mode directly by turning the dial  set  extended menu item 101    SELECTION FOR SEARCH  DIAL ENABLE    to    dial         When extended menu item 101    SELECTION FOR  SEARCH DIAL ENABLE     is set to    dial     after using the  shuttle dial  return it to the center position  If the shuttle  dial is not in the center position  it is possible occasionally  for vibration from other operations to activate the dial  and  start playback in shuttle mode      4  Audio settings section         VARIABLE switch    ALL indicator      ALL CH1  CH 2 to CH4  adjustment knobs          roman ent C2 CS FCA MEER MONTOR  malic   CY Cy GOLO          AUDIO METER SEL button    AUDIO MONITOR SEL button                              VARIABLE  audio level adjustment selector   switch   This selects which of the input audio and playback audio   has the level adjusted by the ALL CH 1  and CH 2 to CH    4 adjustment knobs    REC  Adjust the input audio levels  The playback audio  levels are fixed a
249. tically with the DHCP server   DISABLE  Do not assign automatically   ENABLE  Assign automatically        IP ADDRESS PRESET          Set IP address   192 168 001 010    When DHCP is set to    ENABLE  it is not possible to set the IP address        7 4 Maintenance Menu          NETWORK CONFIG  items relating to network settings       Item  SUBNET MASK PRESET    Setting    Set the subnet mask   255 255 255 000    When DHCP is set to    ENABLE  it is not possible to set the subnet mask        DEFAULT GATEWAY PRESET    Set the default gateway   000 000 000 000    When DHCP is set to    ENABLE  it is not possible to set the default gateway                 LINK SPEED Set the communications speed   AUTO  10Mbps  100Mbps  DUPLEX Set the communications method        AUTO  Full  Full Duplex   Half  Half Duplex           For details of how to make settings  see    To change    network settings     page 115      SETUP MAINTENANCE  items relating to the setup menu       Item  EXTENDED MENU    Setting    Select whether or not to display the extended menu   DISABLE  Do not display   ENABLE  Display        SETUP BANK4    Select the bank to be stored in menu bank 4  or reset menu bank 4    Cur to 4  CURRENT TO BANK amp 4   Store the current menu settings in menu bank 4   1 to 4  BANK1 TO BANK4   Store the menu bank 1 settings in menu bank 4    2 to 4  BANK2 TO BANK amp    Store the menu bank 2 settings in menu bank 4    3 to 4  BANK3 TO BANK amp    Store the menu bank 3 settings in menu bank 
250. tion 25  EXT LK indicator 18    F    Features of PDW R1 9  File access mode   file operations 78  File operations 72   directory structure 72   file access mode 78   FTP 80   restrictions 73  Formatting a disc 39  Forward high speed search 16  Front panel 12  F RUN R RUN switch 13  FTP   command lists 82   file operations 80    G    Glossary 149    H    HOLD button 13  HOLD indicator 18    i LINK connector 22   IN indicator 16   IN OUT button 16   Indicators on back of LCD panel 17  Initial value 44   INT EXT RP188 switch 13  Interfaces 10    J    Jog  dial 14  mode 51  JOG button 14  Jog shuttle control block 14  Jog shuttle transport indicators 14    Index    151      HMM    x    pul WA    152    K    KEY INHI indicator 17  KEY INHI switch 12    L    LCD panel 11  17  Level adjustment 43  LEVEL knob 21  LIGHT switch 20  Line mode   setting 7  Live logging function 71  Loading unloading a disc 38  LOCAL 12    M    Maintenance 72  120  periodic 120  Maintenance menu 112  items 112  operations 114  MARK1 MARK2 button 16  MENU button 14  Menus 89  basic setup menu 90  configuration 89  extended setup menu 97  maintenance menu 112  system menu 117  Metadata 10  MONITOR switch 20    N    Names and functions of parts 11  NDF indicator 18  NETWORK 12  access indicator 12   Network connector 22  NEXT button 16  Nonlinear editing system   connection 27    O    On standby  indicator 12  17  switch 12  Operating mode selection menu setting  section 13  Operation mode 36  OUT indicator 
251. to    REMOTE     control by the remote device ends and then  set the remote control switch to    LOCAL           8 4 Alarms                                                                   display an E E picture when there was  not enough free capacity on the disc  or  when the number of recorded clips had  reached the upper limit  300         Message in time   Display Description Action   data display condition      No Disc  on A button was pressed with no disc Operate after inserting a disc   loaded    No Disc  on  limit  off An attempt to delete a clip was made  with no disc loaded    No Disc  on  limit  off An attempt to format a disc was made  with no disc loaded    REC INHI   on An attempt was made to record  display   To perform these operations on the disc   an E E picture  record an essence mark    set the Write Inhibit tab of the disc to the  or add a quick scene selection sub clip    recording enabled position    REC INHI   on An attempt was made to record  display   To perform these operations  set extended  an E E picture  record an essence mark    menu item 310 to    off      or add a quick scene selection sub clip  while extended menu item 310    REC See 7 3 2    Extended Menu Operations     INHIBIT    was set to    on      page 108  about how to make this setting    IMX50 Clip on  limit A recording or E E display operation was   To perform these operations on the disc    IMX40 Clip attempted on a disc recorded in a format   change the setting of basic menu it
252. to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances     It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  validity of any such claims  this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  system  which is implemented by public license practices  Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system  it is up to the  author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  impose that choice     Notice Concerning the Software License of This Unit    137    ere A    sex pueddy AM    138    This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License     8  If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted    interfaces  the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical  distribution limitation excluding those countries  so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus  excluded  In such case  this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License     9  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License 
253. to move the cursor to CLEAR   and then press the  gt  button     A message like the one shown below appears        CLEAR CLIP LIST    CLEAR OK      CLEAR    TO MENU      SET KEY  MENU_KEY             3 Press the SET button     The current clip list is cleared from the unit memory        5 3 4 Presetting the Initial Time  Code of the Current Clip List    When the unit is powered on  and when you insert a new  disc  the initial time code of the current clip list is set to    5 3 Managing Clip Lists  CLIP Menu     69    uooaj  s   u  os gJa deyo hl    udl Da ag BUBDg Gg Ja deYyD Wa    70       00 00 00 00     You can set the initial time code to any  value     T Load an existing clip list for which you want to set the  initial time code into to the unit memory as the current  clip list     For details  see 5 3 1    Loading a Clip List From Disc  Into Unit Memory     page 68      2 Display the CLIP menu   See    To display the CLIP menu     page 68      3 Use the   button to select TC PRESET  and then press  the  gt  button     A screen like the one shown below appears        CLIP LIST TC PRESET    00 00 00 00    INC DEC   JOG DIAL  SHIFT           KEY  DATA SAVE   SET KEY  TO MENU   MENU KEY             The time code shown in this screen is the current initial  time code of the current clip list  If you have already  set the initial time code for this clip list  that time code  is displayed     4 Repeat the following operations to set a time code  value  LTC      e Press the  lt
254. to the  operating instructions for the unit              3 1 6 Using the RM 280 Editing  Controller    You can connect an RM 280 Editing Controller to this unit  and use it as an editor or as a remote controller     Using the RM 280 as an editor    You can perform assemble and insert editing by  connecting this unit  a VTR  and an RM 280 Editing  Controller    When configuring an editing system that includes this unit  and another VTR  use this unit as the player  feeder      For information about connections  refer to the Operation  Manual for the RM 280     RM 280 settings  EDITOR REMOTE CONTROL switch  EDITOR    Setup menu item 11    P ST DLY     LEARN    For settings on the recorder VTR  refer to the Operation  Manual for the RM 280     PDW R1 settings   Remote control switch  see page 12   REMOTE   Extended menu item 214    REMOTE INTERFACE      9PIN    The RM 280 has not memorized the start delay of this unit   Before editing  have the RM 280 memorize the start delay  of this unit   Use the learn function of the RM 280      Using the RM 280 as a remote controller    You can connect this unit to the RM 280 with an optional  9 pin remote cable to perform editing operations such as  thumbnail search  scene selection  and essence mark    3 1 Connections and Settings 31    suoneied  ld    13 dey9                          suonesed  ld       Ja deyo                          32    recording from the RM 280  when XDCAM mode is  selected      RM 280 settings   EDITOR REMOTE CONTR
255. tomers in the USA   This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  limits for a Class B digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the  FCC Rules  These limits are designed to provide reasonable  protection against harmful interference in a residential  installation  This equipment generates  uses  and can radiate  radio frequency energy and  if not installed and used in  accordance with the instructions  may cause harmful  interference to radio communications  However  there is no  guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  installation  If this equipment does cause harmful interference  to radio or television reception  which can be determined by  turning the equipment off and on  the user is encouraged to try  to correct the interference by one or more of the following  measures       Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna      Increase the separation between the equipment and  receiver      Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  from that to which the receiver is connected      Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for  help     You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to  operate this equipment     All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be    shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device  pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules     3    For the customers in the USA and Canada  RECYCLING
256. tory  Input example  CWD General  CDUP Moves one level up in the directory CDUP  lt CRLF gt   structure  makes the parent of the  current directory be the current  directory    MKD Creates a new directory  MKD  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt   Directories can be created only in the  General directory   For details  see 6 1 2    File Operation  Restrictions     page 73    RMD Deletes a directory  RMD  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt CRLF gt        Directories can be deleted only in the  General directory     For details  see 6 1 2    File Operation  Restrictions     page 73               6 3 FTP File Operations    85    suonesedo aji4 9 Ja deyo NM    suope1ado   ll4 9 Ja deyo WAN    86    Extended commands  The following table shows the extended FTP commands    supported by this unit     In the Command syntax column   lt SP gt  means a space   entered by pressing the space bar  and  lt CRLF gt  means a  new line  entered by pressing the Enter key                                   Command name Description Command syntax  SITE REPF Sends an MXF file from the specified  SITE REPF  lt SP gt   lt path name gt   lt SP gt   lt start frame gt   lt SP gt   path on this unit to the remote  lt transfer size gt   lt CRLF gt   computer  This command allows you to  specify a segment in the body of the  lt start frame gt  specifies an offset from the start of the file   MXF file  composed of video and audio   Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset  the first  data   
257. tting    SDI SUPER  ON  Output           OFF  Do not output     Select whether to output superimpose characters to the SDI OUT  SUPER  connector        For details about OTHERS items other than the above   refer to the Maintenance Manual        7 4 2 Maintenance Menu Operations    Basic maintenance menu operations    The following explains how to select maintenance menu  items and how to change their values  The menu screen  shown are those that appear in the video panel and on a  monitor to which the output of the VIDEO OUT 2   SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER  connector is input    First change the switch setting within the unit  then carry  out the following operations     For information about how to change the switch setting  within the unit  see page 108        Video panel                                                                                                             2 3 5 3 4             1 Press the MENU button     The menu appears in the video panel and on the  external monitor     2 Hold down the COUNTER SEL button  and press the  SET button     The group selection screen of the maintenance menu  appears  The currently selected item group is    7 4 Maintenance Menu    highlighted  and the arrow  9  flashes to indicate that  you can move to a lower level menu           Group selection screen       MAINTENANCE MENU  DRIVE MAINTENANCE  ADJUST  CHECK  BATTERY CONFIG    AUDIO CONFIG Ny    ETWORK CONFIG       ee  SETUP MAINTENANCE    SERVICE SUPPORT  OTHERS    ZN         
258. tton is pressed        146          POWER SAVE MODE       Specifies whether to put the unit into power save mode    off  Do not put the unit into power save mode    on  Put the unit into power save mode  The following operations take  slightly longer to start in power save mode   e Recording  playback  jog and shuttle mode playback  search  e Display of the thumbnail screen and essence marks       Menu items in the 200s  relating to the remote control interface       Item number    Item name    Settings                      214 REMOTE INTERFACE When the remote control switch is set to REMOTE  select the device from  which to remote control this unit   9PIN  Device connected to the REMOTE connector   i LNK  i LINK   Device connected to the    S400  i LINK  connector    215 i LINK MODE Select the connection method for the 4 9400  i LINK  connector    AV C  Connect with AV C   FAM  FAM  PC REMOTE    Connect with FAM    216 PARALLEL RECORDING MODE Specifies whether recording of video and audio on this unit should start  and stop at the same time as recording on a camcorder connected to this  unit by i LINK AV C    off  Do not conduct parallel recording   on  Conduct parallel recording    257 NETWORK ENABLE Select the remote control switch positions which enable network    connections    net  network   Only when the switch is set to    NETWORK       n amp 9P  network  amp  remote 9PIN    When the switch is set to     NETWORK     and when the switch is set to    REMOTE    and exten
259. ual for the unit        3 1 Connections and Settings          Connections using the     400  i LINK  connector    Cut editing system comprising this unit as a player and a DSR   2000 2000P unit as a recorder  For cut editing  the system uses  the editing functions of the recorder  In this system  all signals        75 Q coaxial cable  not supplied               _          such as the video audio signals and control signals are  transferred through the   S400  i LINK  connector     Video monitor    To analog audio input connector               To composite video  input connector                               VIDEO OUT 2   SUPER                                                                  S400  i LINK   PDW R1  player     PDW R1  player  settings  Remote control switch  see page 12   REMOTE  Extended menu item 214    REMOTE INTERFACE     i LINK    Extended menu item 820    AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 CH2 SELECT      moni    a  Use an XLR pin converter plug  not supplied  as required           Cable with XLR connectors  not supplied       e m  Ce ig       i LINK cable  not supplied     e    Video monitor    To composite video input     connector                            i LINK  optional DSBK 190                                                                                               DSR 2000 2000P   recorder     VIDEO OUT 3  SUPER     DSR 2000 2000P  recorder  settings  i LINK button  Lit  SDTI i LINK button  i LINK    For details about the settings of the DSR 2000 2000P  refer 
260. ule  the code     00    must be entered  Freelance operators who do not  belong to an origination should enter    7        e There are no problems in recording or playing back  audio video signals  if ORGANIZATION is not set     USER  user code   Enter the 4 byte alphanumeric strings for user  identification     The user code is registered with each organization locally     It is usually not centrally registered    When the country code is less than 4 bytes  enter the  country code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter  the space character  20h  in the remaining strings    This user code is determined by the organization  The  methods used depend on the organization     User code cannot be entered when no organization code  has been entered     7 3 Extended Menu    111    Gi NM    snuey  Z Ja deyo HA       7 4 Maintenance Menu       7 4 1 Items in the Maintenance Menu    The following tables show the items in the maintenance   menu    e Item names are the names which appear in the video  panel  and on an external monitor to which the output of  the VIDEO OUT 2  SUPER  SDI OUT  SUPER   connector is input    e The values in the Settings columns are the values which  appear in the time data display section   The values may    appear in a different format in the video panel and on an  external monitor  In this case  the video panel values are  shown in parentheses   Underlined values are the factory  defaults     For information about the DRIVE MAINTENANCE   ADJUST  CHECK  
261. unit off  and then power it on again     The selected line mode becomes available for use     You can change the setting made with this procedure  by using basic menu item 013    525 625 SYSTEM  SELECT     See 7 2 2    Basic Menu Operations     page  94  for more information about how to make basic  menu settings     The line mode is not set  or is cleared  in the following   situations  Reset the line mode    e The unit is powered off before performing step 4 in the  previous procedure    e The    RESET ALL SETUP    command in the  maintenance menu  see page 112  is executed     Settings affected by the line mode    The following settings are affected when the line mode is  changed   e Alarm message language  525 J   Japanese  525 U  625  English  e The following menu item names  setting values  or  factory default setting values    Before Using the Unit    7                                                          Item   Item name Settings       No   525  U  525  J    625  Basic menu  002   CHARACTER   00 to OA to 2A_   00 to 09 to 29  H POSITION  003   CHARACTER  00 to 2E to 38  00 to 37 to 43  V POSITION  Extended menu  601   VITC 12H to 16H to 9H to 19H to 22H  POSITION 20H  SEL 1  602   VITC 12H to 18H to 9H to 21H to 22H  POSITION 20H  SEL 2  628   DF MODE Item No item  652  UMID SDI 12Htoi7Hto  9Hto17Hto  VANC LINE  19H 18H  660   ESSENCE 12Hto1i7Hto  9H to 17Hto  MARK SDI 19H 18 H  VANC LINE  703  BLANK LINE   Setting range    Setting range   SELECT ALL LINE  LINE   
262. ution  MPEG 4 based version  of a full resolution MPEG IMX DVCAM stream  a video  bandwidth of 1 5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64 kbps  per channel   Whenever a recording is made  the unit  automatically generates proxy AV data from the full   resolution data and records it on the Professional Disc   Proxy AV data is much smaller in size than the full   resolution IMX or DVCAM data  It can be transferred  quickly over computer networks  easily edited in the field  with laptop computers  and readily used in a wide variety  of applications  such as content management on small   scale servers     Thumbnail search operation    Simply press the THUMBNAIL button and the PDW R1  instantly displays thumbnails on the video panel or a  connected monitor  You can easily cue up the desired  scene by guiding the cursor to the corresponding  thumbnail and confirming your selection with the SET  button     Scene selection    You can create and play back clip lists of selected clips  from the disc  arranged in any order    One disc can store up to 99 clip lists    Clip lists make it simple to perform offline editing in the  field for later use with full scale nonlinear editing systems   XPRI    etc       1  XPRI is a trademark of Sony Corporation     Quick picture search by jog and shuttle  dials    The PDW R1 has jog and shuttle dials as a conventional  VTR to search picture in a clip  The jog dial is for frame   by frame search at    1 to  1 times normal speed and the  shuttle dial is f
263. utton 15  Audio recording  format setting 43  level adjustment 43  Auto clip list recording 48    Basic setup menu 90  items 90  operations 94  BATT display 18  Battery pack shoe 11  Battery packs 33  Built in speaker  monaural  11    C    Carrying handle 11    CHARACTER switch 20  Clip 60  deleting 56 118  locking 55  status 118  user defined name 76  Clip List  previewing 66  Clip list 60  CLIP menu 68  creating and editing 61  current clip list 60  deleting 69  managing 68  previewing 66  saving 66  sorting 70  user defined name 76  Condensation 121  Configuration 11  Connections 25  Camcorder 27  cut editing system 29  external monitor 25  for using PDZ 1 25  nonlinear editing system 27  Connectors 11 21  Control panel 11  12  COUNTER 13  indicator 18  SEL button 13  Current clip list 60  Cut editing system connection 29    D    Date time setting 34  DC IN 12V connector 24  DC OUT 12V connector 21  DC power  using 33  Digital  audio signal inputs outputs 22  hours meter 120  interfaces 10  DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU   IN 1 2  3 4 connectors 22  OUT 1 2  3 4 connectors 22  Disc loaded mark 19  DISC remaining capacity indicator 18  Discs  formatting 39  handling 38  loading unloading 38  status 118  usable discs 38  write protecting 38  Display settings section 19  Drop frame mark 36    E    EJECT button 11  Ejecting a disc manually 39  Error Messages 121  Essence mark 53  Essence mark recording 48  51  Extended setup menu 97   items 97   operations 108  External monitor connec
264. utton or   button   then press the  gt  button     The menu item    QUICK FORMAT    is selected     4 Press the  gt  button     The message    QUICK FORMAT OK     appears     To return to the previous menu page without  formatting the disc  Press the RESET button     5 Press the SET button     Formatting is completed and the message    FORMAT  COMPLETED     appears     6 Press the MENU button   This exits the menu     To format several discs in succession    1 Carry out steps 1 to 5 in the previous procedure  and  then press the EJECT button to eject the disc     2 Insert the next disc that you want to format     The message    QUICK FORMAT OK     appears   3  Press the SET button     4 When the message    FORMAT COMPLETED      appears  press the EJECT button to eject the disc     5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for all of the discs that you want to  format        3 6 6 To Eject Discs With the Unit  Powered Off    When battery power is low and at other times  it may not  be possible to eject discs by pressing the EJECT button  In  these situations  you can use the following as an  emergency procedure to eject a disc manually     T Power the unit off   2 Open the rubber cover and  using a Phillips    screwdriver  rotate the red screw in the  counterclockwise direction     3 6 Handling Discs    39    suolyeredalg    sa deyo                          suoweredaid    Ja deyo                       40                            The disc is ejected    After removing the disc  you do not need to
265. vel meters            Time data display          VITCVIUBCOUNTERHOLD MIA  PB NDF EXT LK       Disc E 00009008B  BATT   E  8GBSG8F  o   U             DISC remaining  capacity indicator       BATT display      Disc loaded mark               Audio level meters   Depending on the setting of the AUDIO METER SEL  button  see page 15   these show the audio recording levels   during recording  or audio playback levels  during  playback  of channels 1 to 4 or channels 5 to 8  If an audio  level exceeds 0 dB  the OVER indicator lights    The DATA indicator lights when non audio signals are  played back    By means of a maintenance menu setting  you can display  a reference level indicator           to the right of each meter  when recording     For details of the maintenace menu  see 7 4    Maintenance  Menu    on page 112        Time data display   Normally  this shows the disc playback time  time code  or   user bit information  as selected by the COUNTER SEL   button  see page 13  and extended menu item 629    TC   SELECT       It is also used for error messages  setup menus  and other   displays    The following indicators are located above the time data   display    COUNTER indicator  This lights when a counter value   hours  minutes  seconds  and frames  resettable  is  displayed in the time data display     2 3 LCD Panel    HOLD indicator  This lights when the internal time code  generator  TCG  is stopped  Does not light when the  output of the time code reader  TCR  is being  
266. w assignment   on  Allow assignment     See 6 1 3    Assigning User Defined Clip Titles     page 75  for more  information about assigning titles                                                              Sub item   1 TITLE Specify whether to assign titles to recorded clips   disable  Do not assign titles to clips   enable  Assign titles to clips    2 PREFIX Set the prefix of the title  up to 10 characters   The allowable characters are  alphanumeric characters  symbols         amp               _      and  the space character    TITLE  3 NUMERIC Set the initial value of the numeric part of the title  00001 to 99999  five digit  number    00001  036 FILE NAMING    Specify whether to allow use of clip and clip list files with user defined  names   See 6 1 4    Assigning User Defined Clip and Clip List Names     page 76  for   Sub item details about how to make the settings    1 NAMING FORM Specify the clip and clip list naming format   Specify whether to allow use of  files with user defined names     c      Standard format  Do not allow use of files with user defined names   free  Free format  Allow use of files with user defined names    2 AUTO NAMING When    free    is selected under the sub item    NAMING FORM     specify  whether to use the standard format name or the same name as the title for  clips recorded on this unit    c      Use the standard format for clip names   title  Use the title set in basic menu item 035    CLIP TITLE NAMING  SELECT    for clip names   B
267. whether the status display backlight is on or off   ON  On    OFF  Off    The factory default setting is ON        MONITOR switch   Selects whether to display video in the video panel   H  Display with high brightness    L  Display with low brightness    OFF  Do not display    The factory default setting is H        2 4 Connectors       Front    QOH    PHONES    Right side      DC OUT 12V connector       REMOTE connector      PHONES jack and LEVEL knob       REF VIDEO IN connector        2 Analog audio signal inputs   outputs  see page 23                          Digital audio signal  inputs outputs  see page          r AUDIO IN       _          REMTE    REF V  EO IN     DIGITAL AUDIO  AES EBU           DC   UT12V       ED        O16    ouT 172    3 4                         Of H0O                                        a             e       8400  i LINK  connector    BE  network  connector           4  SDI signal inputs outputs  see page 23     Analog video signal inputs outputs  see page 23         5 Time code inputs outputs   see page 24           Power supply  section  see  page 24             PHONES jack and LEVEL knob   The jack is a standard stereo jack  Connect stereo  headphones with an impedance of 8 ohms  to monitor the  audio during playback   Non audio signals are muted    The channels monitored are selected by the AUDIO  MONITOR SEL button    Adjust the volume with the LEVEL knob  When extended  menu item 820    AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 CH2 SELECT     is set to    moni 
268. ynchronize to time code input to the TC IN  connector   Connect the time code output from the external device  to the TC IN connector  Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL  button and  while viewing the time data display or the  video panel  select one of SDI  COMPOSITE  or SG     To synchronize to VITC in an input video signal  Connect a video signal containing VITC to the VIDEO  IN connector or the SDI IN connector  Press the  VIDEO INPUT SEL button and  while viewing the  time data display or the video panel  select  COMPOSITE or SDI     To synchronize to SMPTE RP188 LTC in an SDI  signal   Connect an SDI signal containing SMPTE RP188  LTC to the SDI IN connector     To synchronize to i LINK TC   Connect an i LINK signal to the    S400  i LINK   connector  Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL button and   while viewing the time data display or the video panel   select i LINK     To synchronize to i LINK VITC   Connect an i LINK signal to the    S400  i LINK   connector  Press the VIDEO INPUT SEL button and   while viewing the time data display or the video panel   select i LINK     Make the following settings        To synchronize to time code input to the TC IN   connector   e Set the INT EXT RP188 switch to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch to REGEN    e Set extended menu item 629    TC SELECT    to    te        To synchronize to VITC in an input video signal   e Set the INT EXT RP188 switch to EXT and the  PRESET REGEN switch to REGEN    e Set extended menu item 629    TC SELECT    to     vit
269. you can  load and unload a disc as shown in the following figure        On standby switch and  indicator    To unload  Press the EJECT button        To load  Insert a disc face up   The disc is drawn in     The disc loaded mark  see page 19  flashes while the  disc is being inserted  and while it is being ejected  Lights  when loading finishes  and goes out when eject finishes   Recording stops and the disc is ejected if you press the  EJECT button during recording  If you do not want recording  to stop with the EJECT button  set extended menu item 145     MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING     to    stop                 If message    HUMID     appears in the time data  display    There is moisture condensation in the unit     For the steps to take when the message appears  see 8 2     Condensation     page 121         3 6 5 Formatting a Disc    An unused disc requires no formatting operation  The disc  is automatically formatted when loaded into this unit    To format a recorded disc  load the disc into the unit  then  proceed as follows     When a recorded disc is formatted  all the data on the disc  is erased   Locked clips  see page 55  are also erased                                                1 Holding down the SHIFT button  press the MENU  button     The system menu appears on the monitor screen     2 Select    DISC MENU    using the 4 button or    button   then press the  gt  button     The menu item    FORMAT     is displayed     3 Select    FORMAT    using the 4 b
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
User Manual and warranty for  Tivoli Audio Model CD  Nimsoft Service Desk User Guide  CONTROLADOR POWER FEED 10A    Descargar  A SERIES -01 USE MANUAL CHEST PRESS  Whirlpool ACPS82 User's Manual  User Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file